Dc600 crane drive-firmware-manual

DCS 600 CraneDrive Firmware Manual

DCC 600 Crane Application Program 1.1for DCS 600 DC Converters

DCC 600 Crane Application Program 1.1for DCS 600 DC Converters

Firmware Manual

3AST000953R0125EN

EFFECTIVE: 2000-06-21SUPERSEDES: None

2000 ABB Automation Systems AB, Crane Systems. All Rights Reserved

DCC 600 Firmware Manual i

Safety Instructions

OverviewThese safety instructions must be followed when installing, operating andservicing the DCC 600. If neglected, physical injury and death may follow,or damage may occur to the DC converter, the motor and drivenequipment. The material in this chapter must be studied beforeattempting any work on, or with the unit.

Warnings and NotesThis manual distinguishes between two sorts of safety instructions.Warnings are used to inform of conditions that can, if proper steps arenot taken, lead to a serious fault condition, physical injury and death.Notes are used when the reader is required to pay special attention orwhen there is additional information available on the subject. Notes areless crucial than Warnings, but should not be disregarded.

WarningsReaders are informed of situations that can result in serious physicalinjury and/or serious damage to equipment with the following symbols:

Dangerous Voltage Warning: warns of situations in which a highvoltage can cause physical injury and/or can damage equipment. Thetext next to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger.

General Warning: warns of situations that can cause physical injuryand/or can damage equipment by means other than electrical. The textnext to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger.

Electrostatic Discharge Warning: warns of situations in which anelectrostatic discharge can damage equipment. The text next to thissymbol describes ways to avoid the danger.

NotesReaders are notified of the need for special attention or additionalinformation available on the subject with the following symbols:

CAUTION! Caution aims to draw special attention to aparticular issue.

Note: Note gives additional information or points outmore information available on the subject.

Safety Instructions

DCC 600 Firmware Manualii

General Safety InstructionsThese safety instructions are intended for all work on the DCC 600.

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work on theDCC 600 should be carried out by qualified electricians.

The DCC 600 and adjoining equipment must be properly earthened.

The DCC 600 motor cable terminals are at a dangerously high voltage when mains power is applied, regardless of motor operation.There can be dangerous voltages inside the DCC 600 from externalcontrol circuits when the DCC 600 mains power is shut off. Exerciseappropriate care when working with the unit. Neglecting theseinstructions can cause physical injury and death.

WARNING! The DCC 600 introduces electric motors, drive trainmechanisms and driven machines to an extended operating range. Itshould be determined from the outset that all equipment is up to theseconditions.

All insulation tests must be carried out with the DCC 600 disconnected from the cabling. Operation outside the rated capacities should not be attempted. Neglecting these instructions can result in permanentdamage to the DCC 600.

DCC 600 Firmware Manual iii

Table of Contents

1 Chapter 1 - Introduction to this Manual ...................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 1-11.2 Before You Start.................................................................................................................... 1-11.3 What This Manual Contains .................................................................................................. 1-11.4 Related Publications ............................................................................................................. 1-2

2 Chapter 2 – Handling of Control Panel CDP 312 ........................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 2-12.2 DCC 600 Parameter setting .................................................................................................. 2-1

2.2.1 Application Macros....................................................................................................... 2-12.2.2 Parameter Groups ....................................................................................................... 2-1

2.3 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................ 2-12.3.1 Display......................................................................................................................... 2-22.3.2 Keys ............................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.4 Panel Operation .................................................................................................................... 2-42.4.1 Keypad Modes............................................................................................................. 2-42.4.2 Operational Commands ............................................................................................. 2-13

3 Chapter 3 - Start-up .......................................................................................................... ............ 3-1

3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 3-13.2 Start-up Procedure................................................................................................................ 3-13.3 Start-up Data......................................................................................................................... 3-6

3.3.1 Start-up Data Parameters ............................................................................................ 3-63.4 Autotuning............................................................................................................................. 3-8

3.4.1 Armature Current Controller......................................................................................... 3-83.4.2 Field Current Controller.............................................................................................. 3-10

3.5 Manual Tuning .................................................................................................................... 3-113.5.1 Square Wave Generator ............................................................................................ 3-113.5.2 Test Reference Selection........................................................................................... 3-123.5.3 Manual Tuning of the Speed Loop ............................................................................. 3-123.5.4 Manual Tuning of Field Exciters ................................................................................. 3-123.5.5 Manual Tuning of Armature Current Controller........................................................... 3-123.5.6 Manual Tuning of the EMF-Controller ........................................................................ 3-13

3.6 Memory Handling ................................................................................................................ 3-133.6.1 Converter Type Change............................................................................................. 3-133.6.2 Software Update ........................................................................................................ 3-13

4 Chapter 4 - Control Operation ................................................................................................. .... 4-1

4.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 4-14.2 Actual Signals (Group 1) ....................................................................................................... 4-14.3 Description of the Actual Signals (Group 1)........................................................................... 4-34.4 Int Actuals (Group 2) ............................................................................................................. 4-54.5 Fieldbus Words (Group 3) ..................................................................................................... 4-64.6 Information Signals (Group 4) ............................................................................................... 4-64.7 Drive Logic Sigs (Group 6) .................................................................................................... 4-74.8 Fault History.......................................................................................................................... 4-84.9 Local Control vs. External Control ......................................................................................... 4-8

4.9.1 Keypad Control ............................................................................................................ 4-84.9.2 External Control ........................................................................................................... 4-9

Table of Contents

DCC 600 Firmware Manualiv

5 Chapter 5 - Crane Program Description...................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 5-15.2 Application Macros ................................................................................................................ 5-15.3 Stand alone mode operation.................................................................................................. 5-2

5.3.1 Input and Output I/O Signals ........................................................................................ 5-25.3.2 External Connections ................................................................................................... 5-35.3.3 Control Signals Connection Stand Alone mode............................................................ 5-55.3.4 Parameter Settings for the Stand alone mode.............................................................. 5-6

5.4 Fieldbus mode operation ....................................................................................................... 5-85.4.1 Input and Output I/O Signals ........................................................................................ 5-85.4.2 External Connections ................................................................................................... 5-95.4.3 Control Signals Connection in Field Bus Mode........................................................... 5-105.4.4 Speed correction in Fieldbus mode ............................................................................ 5-115.4.5 Parameter Settings for the Fieldbus mode ................................................................. 5-12

5.5 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 5-145.6 Function Module Description ............................................................................................... 5-15

5.6.1 Local operation ( 60 ) ................................................................................................. 5-155.6.2 Speed monitor ( 61 ) .................................................................................................. 5-165.6.3 Torque monitor (62) ................................................................................................... 5-165.6.4 Fast stop ( 63 )........................................................................................................... 5-175.6.5 Crane ( 64 )................................................................................................................ 5-185.6.6 Logic handler ( 65 ) .................................................................................................... 5-255.6.7 Torque proving (66).................................................................................................... 5-285.6.8 Mechanical brake control ( 67) ................................................................................... 5-295.6.9 Power optimisation ( 68 )............................................................................................ 5-315.6.10 Reference handler ( 69) ........................................................................................... 5-335.6.11 Position measurement ( 70 ) .................................................................................... 5-355.6.12 Field bus communication and Fieldbus words ( 71 )................................................. 5-365.6.13 Shared motion (80) .................................................................................................. 5-445.6.14 Master/Follower ( 72 ) .............................................................................................. 5-45

5.7 User Macros........................................................................................................................ 5-51

6 Chapter 6 – DC Converter Functions .......................................................................................... 6- 1

6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 6-16.2 Diagrams............................................................................................................................... 6-26.3 Start and stop sequences Fieldbus mode.............................................................................. 6-5

6.3.1 Start the drive............................................................................................................... 6-56.3.2 Stop the drive............................................................................................................... 6-6

6.4 Field Excitation ...................................................................................................................... 6-76.4.1 Field exciter type selection ........................................................................................... 6-86.4.2 Internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1 ...................................................................... 6-86.4.3 Internal field exciter SDCS-FEX-2 ................................................................................ 6-86.4.4 External field exciters DCF503/504 .............................................................................. 6-86.4.5 Two field exciters at the same time, field current references ........................................ 6-96.4.6 Settings........................................................................................................................ 6-96.4.7 Field Reduction on Stand-Still ...................................................................................... 6-96.4.8 Field Heating at "OFF"-State...................................................................................... 6-106.4.9 Field current / motor FLUX linearisation ..................................................................... 6-11

6.5 EMF - Controller .................................................................................................................. 6-136.5.1 Selection of EMF - controller ...................................................................................... 6-136.5.2 Field weakening area ................................................................................................. 6-13

6.6 ANALOG AND DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................ 6-146.6.1 I/O-Board Configuration ............................................................................................. 6-146.6.2 Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................. 6-146.6.3 Analogue Inputs ......................................................................................................... 6-156.6.4 Analogue Outputs ...................................................................................................... 6-17

Table of Contents

DCC 600 Firmware Manual v

6.6.5 I/O-Extention Board ................................................................................................... 6-186.7 DC-Breaker (Option) ........................................................................................................... 6-196.8 Shared motion..................................................................................................................... 6-196.9 Power loss monitoring and auto-reclosing ........................................................................... 6-20

6.9.1 Short Power Loss ...................................................................................................... 6-206.10 Earth fault monitoring ........................................................................................................ 6-216.11 Monitoring functions .......................................................................................................... 6-21

6.11.1 Speed Measurement Supervision ............................................................................ 6-216.12 Motor protection ................................................................................................................ 6-22

6.12.1 Measured Motor Temperature ................................................................................. 6-226.12.2 Motor Thermal Model............................................................................................... 6-236.12.3 Klixon....................................................................................................................... 6-266.12.4 Armature Overvoltage.............................................................................................. 6-27

7 Chapter 7 - Parameters ................................................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 7-17.2 Parameter Groups................................................................................................................. 7-1

7.2.1 Group 10 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 7-27.2.2 Group 13 Analogue Inputs ........................................................................................... 7-47.2.3 Group 14 I/O Outputs................................................................................................... 7-57.2.4 Group 15 Drive Logic ................................................................................................... 7-87.2.5 Group 16 System Ctr Inputs....................................................................................... 7-127.2.6 Group 17 Test Gen Par.............................................................................................. 7-147.2.7 Group 20 Limits ......................................................................................................... 7-157.2.8 Group 23 Speed Ctrl .................................................................................................. 7-167.2.9 Group 24 Torque Ctrl ................................................................................................. 7-197.2.10 Group 28 Motor Protection....................................................................................... 7-207.2.11 Group 30 Fault Functions......................................................................................... 7-247.2.12 Group 40 Undervolt Monit ........................................................................................ 7-257.2.13 Group 41 Motor Nom Val ......................................................................................... 7-267.2.14 Group 42 Measurement ........................................................................................... 7-287.2.15 Group 43 Current Control......................................................................................... 7-307.2.16 Group 44 Field Excitation......................................................................................... 7-317.2.17 Group 46 EMF Control............................................................................................. 7-327.2.18 Group 50 Speed Measuring ..................................................................................... 7-337.2.19 Group 51 Master Adapter......................................................................................... 7-347.2.20 Group 60 Local operation......................................................................................... 7-347.2.21 Group 61 Speed monitor.......................................................................................... 7-357.2.22 Group 62 Torque Monitor......................................................................................... 7-367.2.23 Group 63 Fast stop .................................................................................................. 7-377.2.24 Group 64 Crane ....................................................................................................... 7-387.2.25 Group 65 Logic handler ........................................................................................... 7-417.2.26 Group 66 Torque Proving......................................................................................... 7-427.2.27 Group 67 Mechanical brake contr. ........................................................................... 7-437.2.28 Group 68 Power optimisation................................................................................... 7-447.2.29 Group 69 Reference Handler ................................................................................... 7-467.2.30 Group 70 Position measurement.............................................................................. 7-487.2.31 Group 71 Fieldbus Comm........................................................................................ 7-497.2.32 Group 72 Master/Follower........................................................................................ 7-507.2.33 Group 80 Shared motion.......................................................................................... 7-557.2.34 Group 92 Dataset TR Addr ...................................................................................... 7-597.2.35 Group 98 Option modules ........................................................................................ 7-607.2.36 Group 99 Start-up Data............................................................................................ 7-61

8 Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 Overview............................................................................................................................... 8-1

Table of Contents

DCC 600 Firmware Manualvi

8.2 Display of status, alarm and fault signals............................................................................... 8-38.3 General messages ................................................................................................................ 8-48.4 Starting errors (E) [from SDCS-CON-2 board] ....................................................................... 8-48.5 Fault Signals (F) .................................................................................................................... 8-58.6 Alarm Signals (A) ................................................................................................................ 8-128.7 Thyristor Diagnosis.............................................................................................................. 8-158.8 Supply Voltage Monitoring................................................................................................... 8-158.9 Watchdog Function.............................................................................................................. 8-168.10 Jumpers on the SCDS-CON-2 board................................................................................. 8-168.11 Fault and Event Logger ..................................................................................................... 8-168.12 Data Logger....................................................................................................................... 8-168.13 Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 8-17

8.13.1 Heatsink................................................................................................................... 8-178.13.2 Fan........................................................................................................................... 8-18

A Appendix A - Complete Parameter and Default Settings ................................................... A-1

B Appendix B - User I/O Interface diagrams........................................................................... B-1

Note: Instructions for Electrical and Mechanical installation are not included in thismanual. They can be found from the DCS 600 Installation Manual.

DCC 600 Firmware Manual 1-1

1 Chapter 1 - Introduction to this Manual

1.1 OverviewThis chapter describes the purpose, contents and the intended audienceof this manual. It also explains the conventions used in this manual andlists related publications. This DCC 600 User’s Manual is compatible withDCC 600 Application Software version DCAA1120.

Software identification of DCS 600 CraneDrive:This software consist of three parts

SDCS-CON-2 Motor Control Firmware 15.2xx (signal 4.11)SDCS-AMC-DC Motor control Firmware 15.6xx (signal 4.02)SDCS-AMC-DC Crane Application software DCAA1xxx (signal 4.03)

1.2 Before You StartThe purpose of this manual is to provide you with the informationnecessary to control and program your DCS 600 Crane Drive, from nowon mentioned as DCC 600.

The audience for this manual is expected to have:• Knowledge of standard electrical wiring practices, electronic

components, and electrical schematic symbols.• Minimal knowledge of ABB product names and terminology.

1.3 What This Manual ContainsSafety Instructions can be found on pages i and ii of this manual. TheSafety Instructions describe the formats for various warnings andnotations used in this manual. This chapter also states the general safetyinstructions which must be followed.

Chapter 1 – Introduction, the chapter you are reading now, introduces youto the DCC 600 User’s Manual and conventions used throughoutthe manual.

Chapter 2 – Handling of Control Panel CDP 312 provides an overview ofhandling your DCC 600 with the control panel. This chapter describes theoperation of the CDP 312 Control Panel used for controlling, settingparameters and reading signals and fault logger data.

Chapter 3 – Start-up gives a Start-up procedure and also lists andexplains the Start-up Data parameters.

Chapter 4 – Control Operation describes actual signals, keypad andexternal controls.

Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description defines the Crane program bydescribing the included crane specific functions and presenting them in ablock diagram. This chapter also describes the User Macro function.

Chapter 6 – DC Converter Functions describes functions like e.g. Startand Stop sequence, Field excitation, EMF-controller and Analog & DigitalI/O.

Chapter 1 Introduction to this Manual

DCC 600 Firmware Manual1-2

Chapter 7 – Parameters lists all the DCC 600 parameters and explainsthe function of each parameter.

Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing describes the fault tracing procedure whenwarnings and faults are indicated. Warnings and faults are listed intabular form with possible causes and remedies.

Appendix A - Complete Parameter and Default Settings lists, in tabularform, all parameter settings and the default values for the DCC 600.

Appendix B - User I/O interface diagrams showing default I/O signalconnections for Stand alone and Fieldbus modes.

1.4 Related PublicationsIn addition to this manual the DCC 600 user documentation includes thefollowing manuals:

• DCS 600 CraneDrive System Description

• DCS 600 Technical Data

• DCS 600 Installation Manual

• DCS 600 Service Manual

• Fieldbus adapters Installation & Start-up Guide (optional)

• Drives Window User’s Manual (optional)

New manuals will be prepared as more Option Modules and otheroptional extras become available. Please ask for them from the local ABBdistributor.


2 Chapter 2 – Handling of Control Panel CDP 312

2.1 Overview

This chapter describes the programming principles of the DCC 600 drive;the operation of the CDP 312 Control Panel; and how to use the panelwith DCC 600 to modify parameters, measure actual values and controlthe drive(s).

2.2 DCC 600 Parameter settingThe user can change the configuration of the DCC 600 to meet theneeds of the requirements by setting parameter values.

2.2.1 Application MacrosParameters can be set one by one or a preprogrammed set ofparameters can be selected. Preprogrammed parameter sets are calledApplication Macros. Refer to Chapter 5 - Crane Program Description forfurther information on Application Macros.

2.2.2 Parameter GroupsIn order to simplify programming, parameters of the DCC 600 drive areorganised into logical Groups. Parameters of the Start-Up Data Groupare described in Chapter 3 – Start-up Data and other parameters inChapter 7 - Parameters. Signals are described in chapter 4.

Start-up Data Parameters

The Start-up Data parameters (Group 99) contains the basic settingsneeded to match the DCC 600 with your motor. This group also containsa list of preprogrammed Application Macros. The Start-up Data Groupincludes parameters that are set at start-up and should not need to bechanged later on. Refer to Chapter 3 – Start-up Data for description ofeach parameter.

The Start-up Data Group is displayed as the first parameter group in theParameter Mode. The correct procedure for selecting a parameter andchanging its value is described in paragraph Table 2-6 Keypad Modes -Parameter Mode. Parameters are described in Chapter 7 - Parameters.

2.3 Control PanelThe CDP 312 Control Panel is the device used for locally controlling andprogramming the DCS 600. The Panel can be attached directly to thedoor of the cabinet or it can be mounted, for example, in a control desk.

Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel


Panel Link

The CDP312 Drives Panel is connected to the drive through a Modbuscommunication bus. It is connected with an electrical cable or an adapterto connectors X33 or X34 situated on the control board SDCS-CON-2.Modbus, which is based on the RS485 standard, is a common busprotocol for ABB Drives products. The communicationspeed is 9600 bit/s.

1 L " 0.0 rpm 0

MOTOR TO 0.00 %

LED PANE 0 %MOTOR SP 0.0 rpm

0

FUNC DRIVE

ENTER

LOC RESET REF

REM

PARACT

CDP 312

Figure 2-1 CDP 312 Control Panel

2.3.1 DisplayThe LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters.

The Control Panel display is an LCD type display of drive functions, driveparameter selections, and other drive information. Letters or numbersappear on the display according to which Control Panel keys arepressed. The language for display of texts on the CDP 312 Control Panelis English.

2.3.2 KeysThe 16 Control Panel keys are flat, labeled, push-button keys that allowyou to monitor drive functions, select drive parameters, and change drivemacros and settings.

6\ZW33=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+



Actual Signal Display Mode

Parameter Mode

Function Mode

Drive Selection Mode

ACT

PAR

FUNC

DRIVE

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW+8+691?/38:?>==-+6/+3

6 \ZW?:69+.&'&'.9A869+.'('(-98><+=>

.-= 3.8?7,/<.-++## >9>+6.<3@/=

Figure 2-2 Control Panel Display indications and function of the Control Panel keys.

LOC

REM

RESET

REF

Keypad /External Control

Fault Reset

Reference Setting Function

Forward

Reverse Stop

Start

0

Figure 2-3 Operational commands of the Control Panel keys.

On

Off



2.4 Panel OperationThe outlook of the Control Panel Keys and the Display Modes are shownin Figures 2-1, 2-2 and 2-3 (see section 2.3 obove). The following is adescription of the operation of the CDP 312 Control Panel.

2.4.1 Keypad ModesThe CDP 312 Control Panel has four different keypad modes: ActualSignal Display Mode, Parameter Mode, Function Mode, and DriveSelection Mode. In addition to this there is a special IdentificationDisplay, which is displayed after connecting the panel to the link. TheIdentification Display and the keypad modes are described briefly below.

Identification Display

When the panel is connected for the first time, or the power is applied tothe drive, the Identification Display appears showing the panel IDnumber and the number of drives connected to the link.

Note: The panel can be connected to the drive while power is applied tothe drive.

After two seconds, the display will clear, and the Actual Signals of theselected drive will appear.

Actual Signal Display Mode

This mode includes two displays, the Actual Signal Display andthe Fault History Display. The Actual Signal Display is displayed firstwhen the Actual Signal Display mode is entered. If the drive is in a faultcondition, the Fault Display will be shown first.

The panel will automatically return to Actual Signal Display Mode fromother modes if no keys are pressed within one minute (exceptions:Status Display in Drive Selection Mode and Fault Display Mode).

In the Actual Signal Display Mode you can monitor three Actual Signalsat a time. For more information of actual signals refer to Chapter 4Control Operation. How to select the three Actual Signals to the displayis explained in Table 2-3, page 2-6.

The Fault History includes information on the 24 most recent faults thathave occurred in your DCC 600. The name of the fault and the totalpower-on time are displayed. If the AC80 overriding system has beenconnected to the drive (DDCS channel 0), this time can be seen in thedate format instead of power-on time. The procedure for clearing theFault History is described in Table 2-4, page 2-7.

-.::+8/63.8?7,/<

>9>+6.<3@/=



The following table shows the events that are stored in the Fault History.For each event it is described what information is included.

Table 2-1 Events stored in the Fault History

Event Information Display

A fault is detected byDCC 600

Sequential number of the event.Name of the fault and a “+” signin front of the name. Total poweron time or date and time updatedby overriding system.

A fault is reset by user. Sequential number of the event.-RESET FAULT text.Total power on time or date andtime updated by overridingsystem.

A warning is activated byDCC 600

Sequential number of the event.Name of the fault and a “+” signin front of the name. Total poweron time or date and time updatedby overriding system.

A warning is deactivatedby DCC 600

Sequential number of the event.Name of the warning and a “-”sign in front of the name. Totalpower on time or date and timeupdated by overriding system.

When a fault or warning occurs in the drive, the message will bedisplayed immediately, except in Drive Selection Mode. Table 2-5, page2-7, shows how to reset a fault. Refer to chapter 8 for information on faulttracing. From the fault display, it is possible to change to other displayswithout resetting the fault. If no keys are pressed the fault or warning textis displayed as long as the fault exists.

6 \ZW6+=>0+?6>9@/<@96>+1/2738=

6 \ZW6+=>0+?6></=/>0+?6>2738=

6 \ZW6+=>A+<838149C=>3-52738=

6 \ZW6+=>A+<838149C=>3-52738=



Table 2-2 How to display the full name of the three Actual Signals.

Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed

1. To display the full name ofthe three actualsignals

HoldACT

2. To return to the Actual SignalDisplay Mode

ReleaseACT

Table 2-3 How to select Actual Signals to the display.


1. To enter the Actual SignalDisplay Mode

ACT

2. To select the desired row.

3. To enter the Actual SignalSelection Mode.

ENTER

4. To select a different group.

5. To select an index.

6a.

or

6b.

To accept the selection and toreturn to the Actual SignalDisplay Mode.

To cancel the selection andkeep the original selection,press any of the Mode keys.The selected Keypad Mode isentered.

ENTER

ACT PAR

FUNC DRIVE

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW+->?+6=318+6=>9<;?/

6 \ZW79>9<=://.036>79>9<>9<;?/036>79>9<-?<</8>

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW38>=318+6==:</0!\ZW

6 \ZW38>=318+6==:</0!\ZW

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW=:</0!\ZW-?<</8>+



Table 2-4 How to display a fault and reset the Fault History.


1. To enter the Actual SignalDisplay Mode

ACT

2. To enter the Fault HistoryDisplay.Logging time can be seen eithertotal power-on time or in thedate format, if overriding system(ex. AC80) has been connectedto control the drive.

3. To select previous (UP) or nextfault (DOWN).

To clear the Fault History.

After the fault text there is letter ror s indicating the status of thefault:s = setr = reset

The Fault History is empty.Note! An active fault does notclear a fault in the logger

RESET

4. To return to the Actual SignalDisplay Mode.

Table 2-5 How to display and reset an active fault.


1. To enter the Actual SignalDisplay Mode.

ACT

2. To reset the fault. Reset buttoncan also be used in theREMOTE mode. RESET

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW6+=>0+?6>9@/<-?<</8> 2738=

6 \ZW6+=>0+?6>9@/<@96>+1/2738=

6 \ZW6+=>0+?6>

2738=

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW.-= !UA0+?6>-98@>/7:

6 \ZW=://.\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+



Parameter Mode

The Parameter Mode is used to make changes to the DCC 600parameters. When this mode is entered for the first time after power up,the display will show the first parameter of the first group. Next time theParameter Mode is entered, the previously selected parameter is shown.

NOTE: If you try to write to a write-protected parameter, the followingwarning will be displayed:

Table 2-6 How to select a parameter and change the value.


1. To enter the Parameter ModeSelection

2. To select another parametergroup.

While holding the arrow down,only the group name andnumber are displayed. When thekey is released, name, numberand value of the first parameterin the group is displayed.

3. To select an index.

While holding the arrow down,only the parameter name andnumber are displayed. When thekey is released the value of theparameter is also displayed.

4. To enter the Parameter SettingMode.

ENTER

5. To change the parameter value.(slow change)

(fast change)

6a.

or

6b.

To send a new value to thedrive.

To cancel the new setting andkeep the original value.

The selected Keypad Mode isentered.

ENTER

ACT PAR

FUNC DRIVE

A+<8381A<3>/+--/==./83/.:+<+7/>/<=/>>38189>:9==3,6/

6(\ZW+8+691?/38:?>==-+6/+3

6(\ZX+8+691?/38:?>==-+6/+3

6 \ZW399?>:?>=.9"9?>:?>0+?6>8

6 \ZW399?>:?>=.9"9?>:?>-98><9669-

6 \ZW399?>:?>=.9"9?>:?>E0+?6>8G

6 \ZW399?>:?>=.9"9?>:?>E-98><9669-G

6 \ZW+8+691?/38:?>==-+6/+3

6 \ZW399?>:?>=.99?>:?>,<+5/630>

PAR



Function Mode

The Function Mode is used to select special functions. These functionsinclude Parameter Upload, Parameter Download and setting the contrastof the CDP 312 Control Panel display.

UPLOAD

DOWNLOAD

DCC 600Drive

Parameter Upload will copy all parameters and the results of motoridentification from the drive to the panel. The upload function can beperformed while the drive is running. Only the OFF command can begiven during the uploading process.

By default, Parameter Download will copy existing parameter Groups10 to 99 stored in the panel to the drive.

Table 2-7, page 2-10, describes how to select and perform ParameterUpload and Parameter Download functions.

A+<838189>?:69+./..9A869+.38189>:9==3,6/

Uploading has to be done before downloading. If downloading isattempted before uploading, the following warning will be displayed:

A+<8381.<3@/38-97:+>3,6/.9A869+.38189>:9==3,6/

The parameters can be uploaded and downloaded only if the softwareversion of the destination drive is the same as the software version of thesource drive. Otherwise the following warning will be displayed:

A+<8381.<3@/3=<?88381.9A869+.38189>:9==3,6/

The drive must be stopped during the downloading process. If the driveis running and downloading is selected, the following warning isdisplayed:



Table 2-7 How to select and perform a function.


1. To enter the Function Mode.

FUNC

2. To select a function (a flashingcursor indicates the selectedfunction).

3. To activate the selectedfunction.

ENTER

4. Loading completed.

Table 2-8 How to set the contrast of the panel display.


1. To enter the Function Mode.

FUNC

2. To select a function.

3. To enter contrast settingfunction.

ENTER

4. To set the contrast.(0...7)

5a.

or

5b.

To accept the selected value

To cancel the new setting andkeep the original value, pressany of the Mode keys.


ENTER

ACT PAR

FUNC DRIVE

6 \ZW?:69+.&'&'.9A869+.'('(-98><+=>

6 \ZW

?:69+.&'&'.9A869+.'('(

6 \ZW'('('('('('('(.9A869+.

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW?:69+.&'&'.9A869+.'('(-98><+=>

6 \ZW?:69+.&'&'.9A869+.'('(-98><+=>

6 \ZW-98><+=>EG

6 \ZW-98><+=>E G

6 \ZW?:69+.&'&'.9A869+.'('(-98><+=>

6 \ZW?:69+.&'&'.9A869+.'('(-98><+=>



Copying parameters from one unit to other units

You can copy parameters 10...97 from one drive to another by using theParameter Upload and Parameter Download functions in the FunctionMode. Typically this kind of function can be used if the processes andthe motor types are same. This procedure is permitted only if the sw-versions are the same. Follow the procedure below:

1. Select the correct options (Group 98) and macro (Group 99) for each drive.

2. Set the rating plate values for the motors (Group 99).

3. Set the parameters in Groups 10 to 97 as preferred in one DCC 600 drive.

4. Upload the parameters from the DCC 600 to the panel(see Table 2-7).

5. Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the next DCC 600 unit.

6. Ensure the target DCC 600 is in Local control (L shown on the first row of the display). If necessary, change the control location by

pressing

LOC

REM .

7. Download the parameters from the panel to the DCC 600 unit (see Table 2-7).

8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the rest of the units.

Note: Parameters in Groups 98 and 99 concerning options, macro and motor data are not copied.1)

Setting the contrast

If the Control Panel Display is not clear enough, set the contrastaccording to the procedure explained in Table 2-8.

1) The restriction prevents downloading of incorrect motor data (Group 99).In special cases it is also possible to upload and download Groups 98and 99.For more information, please contact your local ABB representative.



Drive Selection Mode

In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode arenot needed; these features are reserved for applications where severaldrives are connected to one Modbus Link.

Modbus Link is the communication link connecting the Control Panel andthe DCC 600. Each on-line station must have an individualidentification number (ID). By default, the ID number of the DCC 600 is 1.

CAUTION! The default ID number setting of the DCC 600 should not bechanged unless it is to be connected to the Modbus Link with otherdrives on-line.

Table 2-9 How to select a drive and change ID number.


1. To enter the Drive Selection Mode

DRIVE

2. To select the next view.

The ID number of the station ischanged by first pressing ENTER(the brackets round the ID numberappear) and then adjusting the

value with arrow buttons .The new value is accepted withENTER. The power of the DCC 600must be switched off to validate itsnew ID number setting (the newvalue is not displayed until thepower is switched off and on.

The Status Display of all devicesconnected to the Panel Link isshown after the last individualstation. If all stations do not fit on

the display at once, press toview rest of them.

1á 2Ñ 3Ü 4Ö 5Ö 6á 7F 8Ö 9Ö 10Ö

á = Drive stopped, directioon forward

Ñ = Drive running, direction reverse

F = Drive has tripped on a fault

3. To connect to the last displayeddrive and enter another mode, pressone of the Mode keys.


ACT PAR

FUNC

.-= 3.8?7,/<.-++## >9>+6.<3@/=

.-= 3.8?7,/<.-++## >9>+6.<3@/=

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+



2.4.2 Operational CommandsOperational commands control the operation of the DCC 600. Theyinclude switching On and Off, starting and stopping the drive andadjusting the reference. The reference value is used for controlling themotor speed.

Changing control Location

Operational commands can be given from the CDP 312 Control Panelalways when the status row is displayed and the control location is thepanel. This is indicated by L (Local Control) on the display. See thefollowing figure.

Remote Control (control from the overriding system or I/O is indicated byempty field. See the following figure.

Operational commands cannot be given from this panel when in RemoteControl. Only monitoring actual signals, setting parameters, uploadingand changing ID numbers is possible.

The control is changed between Keypad and External control locations bypressing the LOC / REM key. Changing control location is only possiblewhile motor is stopped. Only one of the Local Control devices (CDP 312or Drives Window) can be used as the local control location at a time.Refer to Chapter 4 - Control Operation for the explanation of Keypad andExternal control.

Direction of actual rotation is indicated by the reference sign.

On, Off, Start, Stop and Reference

On, Off, Start and Stop commands are given from the panel by pressingthe keys

Forward Reverse StopStart0

Table 2-10 explains how to set the Reference from the panel.

6 \ZW

\ZW

\ZW

\ZW

Forward Reverse

On Off



Table 2-10 How to set the reference.


1. Press one of these keys to getthe status row displayed. ACT PAR

FUNC

2. To enter the Reference SettingMode REF

3. To change the reference, pos orneg.(slow change):

(fast change):

4. To exit the Reference SettingMode.


ACT PAR

FUNC DRIVE

Note: Reverse speed is achieved by decreasing reference to a negative value.

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 E\ZWG=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 E \ZWG=://. \ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

6 \ZW=://. \ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+


3 Chapter 3 - Sta rt-up

3.1 OverviewThis chapter lists and explains the Start-up Procedure and the Start-upData Parameters. The Start-up Data Parameters are a special set ofparameters that allow you to set up the DCC 600 and motor information.Start-up Data Parameters should only need to be set during start-up andshould not need to be changed afterwards.

3.2 Start-up ProcedureThe start-up procedure of DCC 600 converters equippedwith CraneDrive Application Program is described in thischapter.

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work describedin this chapter should only be undertaken by a qualified electrician. TheSafety Instructions on the first pages of this manual and appropriatehardware manual must be followed.

Refer to Chapter 8 – Fault Tracing in case of trouble.

START-UP FLOWCHART

SAFETY

The start-up procedure should only be carried out by a qualified electrician.

Follow the safety instructions on the first pages of this manual during the start-upprocedure.

Check the installation before the start-up procedure. Refer to Installation manual.

Check that starting the motor does not cause any danger.

It is recommended having the driven equipment disengaged when first start is performed ifthere is the risk of damage to the driven equipment in case of incorrect rotation direction of themotor.

Chapter 3 - Start-up


START-UP FLOWCHART

1 – POWER-UP

Apply mains power.

The Control Panel enters the Identification Display.

The Control Panel enters the Actual Signal Display Modeautomatically in a few seconds.

2 – START-UP DATA ENTERING

Select the Application Macro.Press PAR key.

Press ENTER. Square brackets appear around theparameter value. Scroll available options with and .Accept the selection with ENTER.

A detailed description of the Application Macros isincluded in Chapter 5.

2 – START-UP DATA ENTERING

6\ZW=://.\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

-.::+8/63.8?7,/<

>9>+6.<3@/=

6\ZW##=>+<>?:.+>++::63-+>3987+-<9-<+8/

6\ZW##=>+<>?:.+>++::63-+>3987+-<9E-<+8/G



START-UP FLOWCHART

Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate.

MOTOR NOM VOLTAGEMotor nominal voltage

Press PAR key. Press to move to Parameter 99.5.

Press ENTER. Enter the value by and . PressENTER.

The value is used for scaling EMF-based measured /calculated actual speed (SPEED ACT EMF).

Note: Enter exactly the value given on the nameplate.Repeat the procedure for the following parameters:

MOTOR NOM CURRENTMotor nominal current 99.6Set equal to rated armature current. The value is used forscaling the armature current by means of measuredconverter current.

MOTOR NOM SPEEDNominal speed 99.8Range: 1 … 18000 rpmSet the Nominal speed as rated speed given on the motornameplate. (should be equal to fieldweakening speed ofmotor).

MOT 1 NOM FLD CURMotor 1 nominal Field current 41.3. Set equal to rated fieldcurrent for motor 1. The value is used scaling the fieldcurrent measurement.

MOT 2 NOM FLD CURMotor 2 nominal Field current 41.17. Set equal to ratedfield current for motor 2 (second motor in shared motion).The value is used scaling the field current measurement.

6\ZW ##=>+<>?:.+>+79>9<897@96>+1/EG

6 \ZW ##=>+<>?:.+>+ 79>9<897-?<</8>EG

6 \ZW 79>9<897@+679>89706.-?<EG

6 \ZW 79>9<897@+6!79>89706.-?<EG

6 \ZW ##=>+<>?:.+>+"79>9<897=://.EG



START-UP FLOWCHART

3 – SELECT FIELD EXCITER TYPE & SUPPLY VOLTAGE & BRAKE I/O

Set type of field exciter(s) used.USED FEX TYPE 15.5See description of parameter 15.5 in chapter 7.

NOM SUPPLY VOLTNominal supply voltage 42.6. Set equal to nominal ACsupply voltage used.

Check Brake I/O parameter settings 10.1 and 14.1-14.5.

4 – ROTATION DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR

Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value:Press ACT, PAR or FUNC key to enter Keypad Mode withthe status row visible. Change the Speed Reference valueby pressing REF and then or . Press (Start) tostart the motor. Check that the motor is running in thedesired direction. Stop the motor by pressing .

6 \ZW .<3@/6913-?=/.0/B>C:/EG

6(EbbbG\ZW=://.bbbb\ZW>9<;?/bb-?<</8>bb+

6 \ZW 7/+=?</7/8> 897=?::6C@96>EG



5 – SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES

START-UP FLOWCHART

5 – SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES

Press PAR. Use and to scroll parameters.

Minimum speed

Enter the value by ENTER and or . Press ENTER.Repeat the procedure for the following parameters:

Maximum speed

Acceleration times

Deceleration times

For other parameters see Chapter 5 – Parameters, settingtables 5-1 and 5-2.

6(\ZW6373>=73837?7=://.EG

6(\ZW6373>=7+B37?7=://.EG

6(\ZW #</0/</8-/2+8.6/<+-->37/09<AEG

6(\ZW #</0/</8-/2+8.6/<+-->37/</@EG

6(\ZW #</0/</8-/2+8.6/<./->37/09<AEG

6(\ZW #</0/</8-/2+8.6/<./->37/</@EG



3.3 Start-up Data

3.3.1 Start-up Data ParametersTo access the Start-up Data Parameters you must enter the ParameterMode. The Start-up Data Parameters appear on the display (ParameterGroup 99). After the Start-up parameters for the motor are set, the displayshows the last edited Parameter Group when entering Parameter Modeand no longer returns to the Parameter Group 99.

In the Start-up Data group there are parameters for selecting theApplication Macro and the Motor Information Parameters containing thebasic settings required to match the DCC 600 with your motor.

When changing the value fo the Start-up Data Paramters, follow theprocedure described in Chapter 2 – Overview of DCC 600 Programming,Table 1-6, page 1-8. Table 3-1, page 1-8, lists the Start-up DataParameters. The Range/Unit column in Table 3-1 shows the parametervalues, which are explained in detail below the table.

WARNING! Running the motor and the driven equipment with incorrectstart-up data can result in improper operation, reduction in control accuracyand damage to equipment.

Table 3-1 Group 99, Start-up Data Parameters.

Parameter Range/Unit Description2 APPLICATIONMACRO

Application macros Application macroselection.

3 APPLICRESTORE

NO; YES Restores parameters tofactory setting values.

5 MOTOR NOMVOLTAGE

5.0 … 1800.0 V (printedon the motornameplate)

Nominal voltage from themotor rating plate.

6 MOTOR NOMCURRENT

0.0 … 10000.0 A(printed on the motornameplate)

Matches the DCC 600 tothe rated motor current.

8 MOTOR NOMSPEED

20.0 ... 7500.0 rpm(printed on the motornameplate)

Nominal speed from themotor rating plate.

9 DEVICE NAME - Name of drive section.



Parameter Selection

The following is a list of the Start-up Data Parameters with a descriptionof each parameter. The motor data parameters 99.5 ... 99.8 are alwaysto be set at start-up.

2 APPLICATION This parameter is used to select between the CRANE macro, for craneMACRO drive functions but not including Master/Follower bus communication, and

the M/F CTRL macro with the crane drive functions plus Master/Followerbus communication.. Refer to Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description, fora description of the two available Macros. There is also a selection forsaving the current parameter settings as a User Macro (USER 1 SAVE orUSER 2 SAVE), and recalling these settings (USER 1 LOAD or USER 2LOAD).

Parameter group 99 is not included in application macros CRANE andM/F CTRL. The parameter settings in group 99 will remain the same eventhough the macro is changed to CRANE or M/F CTRL.

NOTE: User Macro load restores also the motor settings of the Start-upData group 99. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used.

3 APPLIC RESTORE Selection Yes restores the original settings of an application macro asfollows:- If application macro CRANE or M/F CTRL is selected, the parametervalues are restored to the settings loaded at the factory. Exceptions:Parameter setting in group 99 remain unchanged.- If User Macro 1 or 2 is selected, the parameter values are restored tothe last saved values.

5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE This parameter matches the DCC 600 with the nominal armature voltageof the motor as indicated on the motor rating plate.

6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT This parameter matches the DCC 600 to the rated motor armaturecurrent.

8 MOTOR NOM This parameter matches the DCC 600 to the nominal speed as indicatedSPEED on the motor rating plate = Field weakening point.

9 DEVICE NAME Name of drive section can be entered to this parameter usingDrivesWindow.



3.4 Autotuning

3.4.1 Armature Current ControllerThe parameters of the armature current controller can be defined byusing the autotuning function. After nominal values of the motor and theconverter are programmed, the autotuning feature can be executed.The motor (and possibly the gear) are supposed to be free-running, and“Brake lift” plus “Brake acknowledge” are already in operation – if not,breaks have to be lifted manually before autotuning. Set panel in position“LOCAL”

Single drive

Suppose no Shared motion (Par. 16.6=OFF).a) Set parameter 15.02 (=DRIVE MODE) to 3.

Note – Execute the next two steps within 20 seconds!

b) Give ON-order.

c) Give START-orderNow wait – motor will start automatically, and also stop.

d) Tuning is completed, when par. 15.02 changes back to zero.

e) Give STOP-order.

f) Give OFF-order.(If the drive trips during the autotuning, the program sets 15.02=-1,and the reason can be read on signal 6.02=COMMISS STATUS,see below).Note – The results from the autotuning can now be read in group 1:

g) Read the following signals, and also note them down:1.28=ARM L1.29=ARM R1.30=ARM CUR PI P-GAIN1.31=ARM CUR PI I-GAIN1.32=DISCONT CUR LIMIT

h) Now enter the found values to the following parameters:41.11=ARM L41.12=ARM R43.2=ARM CUR PI P-GAIN43.3=ARM CUR PI I-GAIN43.6=DISCONT CUR LIMIT

i) Make a new init, that is, mains supply OFF-ON.

Autotuning of Motor 1 when Shared motion

• Parameter 16.6 (=SHARED MOTION SEL) has earlier been set to‘ON’.

• Parameter 15.5 (=USED FEX TYPE) has been set, with regard toShared motion.

• The converter is now connected to Motor 1.

• Check that signal 1.11 (=MOTOR SELECTED) shows ‘MOTOR 1’.

• Now execute points a)→i) under Single drive above.

• Autotuning for Motor 1 is now ready, and found values have beenwritten to actual parameters!



Autotuning of Motor 2 when Shared motion

• Suppose one of the following alternatives:Alt. 1The fieldbus is in operation, and the converter has been ordered(from fieldbus) to change to Motor 2-parameters.Alt. 2The fieldbus is not yet in operation. The converter has to beordered to go to Motor 2-parameters by setting par. 16.6 to ‘FORCEMOT 2’.

• Parameter 15.5 (=USED FEX TYPE) has been set=4.

• The converter is connected to Motor 2.

• Check that signal 1.11 (=MOTOR SELECTED) Shows ‘MOTOR 2’.

• Now execute points a)→g) under Single drive.(Note – not points h) and i).

• Enter the found values to the following parameters:80.10=ARM L 280.11=ARM R 280.13=ARM CUR PI PGAIN280.14=ARM CUR PI IGAIN280.15=DISCOUNT CUR LIM 2

• If par. 16.6 was changed to ‘FORCE MOT 2’ above, now change itback to ‘ON’.

• Make a new init, that is, mains supply OFF-ON.

• Autotuning for Motor 2 is now ready, and found values have beenwritten to actual parameters in group 80!

Fault codes of the signal COMMIS STATUS (6.02):

49: Field not nominal during start.

50: Ohmic load not determined.

51: Current feedback is less than current reference duringmeasurement of armature resistance. Current limits lower than thelimit for continuous current flow or lower than 20%.

52: Inadmissible current curve. Fuse blown, thyristor not firing or nomotor load.

53: Wrong starting conditions. The drive is running when the autotuningis started or run command is not given within 20 s after start ofautotuning.

54: Too high speed during autotuning .Speed greater than 1% or EMFgreater than 15%.

55: Inductance cannot be determined. Fuse blown, thyristor notfiring orno motor load.

56: Limit for continous current flow cannot be determined.



57: The field removal takes longer than 10 s. If the SDCS-FEX-1 is used,ensure, that the field current is zero.

58: Blocking or stop signal appears during autotuning.

3.4.2 Field Current ControllerThe parameters of the field current controller for a single drive – or for Motor 1in a Shared motion drive - can be defined by using the autotuning function.After nominal values of the motor and the converter are programmed, theautotuning feature can be executed.To start the autotuning follow the next steps:

Command the drive to ON state (main contactor closed, NOT running)Set parameter DRIVEMODE (15.02) to 5

Tuning is completed, if the DRIVEMODE (15.02) changes back to zero. Theconverter can than be switched off.

If the drive trips during the autotuning, the program setsDRIVEMODE (15.02) to -1

The reason for tripping can be read from the signal COMMIS STATUS (6.02).

Fault codes of the signal COMMIS STATUS (6.02):

61: Illegal start conditions (drive not in ON state).

62: FEX autotuning not possible.

63: FEX autotuning not possible.

Note: Tuning of the field current controller for Motor 2 (second field exciter) in aShared motion drive must be done manually. See part 3.5.



3.5 Manual TuningIn order to facilitate the tuning of the drive, DCS600 MultDrive has severalmanual tuning functions. With help of the manual tuning the following functionscan be tuned:

• Armature current controller• Field exciters• EMF controller• Speed loop

When manual tuning is activated, the normal reference is switched off from thefunction and is replaced by test reference. The test reference can be either asquare wave generator or an adjustable test-reference.

Manual tuning can be activated only in LOCAL-mode.

Y2

T t

Y1 O

SQRWAVE

MUX-I4

O

A

IA4IA3IA2IA1

I1

I2I1<I2

I1=I2I1>I2

COMP-I

I1I2

I1<I2I1=I2

I1>I2COMP-I

I1

I2I1<I2

I1=I2I1>I2

COMP-I

I1

I2

I1<I2I1=I2

I1>I2

COMP-I

I1I2

I1<I2I1=I2

I1>I2COMP-I

(DRIVEMODE4)

(DRIVEMODE7)

"Man. tun. of EMF controller"

"Man. tun. of speed loop"

"Man. tun. second field exciter"

"Man. tun. of first field exciter"

"Man. tun. of arm. cur. controller"

(DRIVEMODE11)

(DRIVEMODE9)

(DRIVEMODE8)

11

9

8

7

4

TEST REFERENCE

SQUARE

SQR WAVE PERIOD

POT 2

POT 1

dcs_600\docu\fig_35.ds4

TEST REF SELECT

DRIVE MODE

3.03

used test reference

Figure 3-1 Object and test reference selections in the manual tuning.

The activation of the manual tuning parameter:

DRIVE MODE (15.02)

4 = armature current controller7 = first field exciter8 = second field exciter9 = speed loop (reference chain and speed controller)11 = EMF controller

3.5.1 Square Wave GeneratorThe output of the square wave generator is adjusted by using 3 parameters:POT 1 (17.01) Higher value of the generatorPOT 2 (17.02) Lower value of the generator

SQR WAVE PERIOD (17.03) Period time of square wave generator

The output of the square wave generator can be read from the signalSQUARE WAVE



3.5.2 Test Reference SelectionThe test reference is selected by the parameter

TEST REF SEL (17.04)0 0 Test signal is 01 POT1 use pot 12 POT2 use pot 23 SQR WAV use square wave4 TST REF use test reference (Not used in DCC)

Finally start the drive or only close main contactor in a case of field exciters.Measurements are recommended to do with Drives Window.

3.5.3 Manual Tuning of the Speed LoopThe test reference replaces the currently used speed reference. When usingthe square wave function, the drive can be set to accelerate and deceleratecontinuously without applying a new reference.

3.5.4 Manual Tuning of Field ExcitersThe test reference replaces the field exciter references. When using the squarewave function, the field reference can be stepped. Actual valuesFIELD CUR M1(2) 1.6 & 1.7 can be monitored by the Drives Window. Bymeans of reference and actual value monitoring the gain values can easily beadjusted.

3.5.5 Manual Tuning of Armature Current ControllerDuring the test the field contactor is automatically opened to prevent the motorfrom running.

The test reference replaces the ARMAT CURRENT REF, current limitation isnot by-passed.

Find continuous/discontinuous current limit

The continuous current limit can be found by slowly increasing the currentreference and at the same time monitoring the bit CONTINOUS_CURR (12) inCON2 BITS (6.05) with the Drives Window. The limit is reached when the bit-signal oscillates.

After the limit is reached , the actual current is read and the value is set to thelimit parameter:

CONV CUR ACT (1.4) ⇒ DISCONT CUR LIMIT (43.06)

Tuning of the armature current controller

After setting the discontinuous current limit, the PI-controller can be tunednormally by using the square wave generator.



3.5.6 Manual Tuning of the EMF-ControllerPrior to the tuning of the EMF-controller the field controller has to be tuned.

The tuning principle

• The motor is started to run about half speed of the used field weakeningarea.

• The signal EMF VOLT ACT (1.9) is read. The value is used to define thesteps. The higher value of the step can be the value that are read.The lower value of the step can be 15% less.Settning the step:

[ ][ ] 2804V42.06

VACTVOLTEMF17.1POT1 ∗==

POT2 = 17.2 = 17.1 * 0.85

Where EMF VOLT ACT [V] is the actual (read) emf voltage, and 42.06 isthe nominal supply voltage.

• The manual tuning function is activated (DRIVE MODE (15.02) = 11). ThePI-controller can be tuned normally by using the square wave generator.

3.6 Memory Handling

3.6.1 Converter Type ChangeWhen the converter type or the converter control board SDCS-CON-2 havebeen changed / replaced, the warning “Type code changed“ is generated aslong as the new converter type specific parameters haven’t been stored insidethe SDCS-CON-2’s parameter FLASH memory (D35). This is done by settingthe DRIVE MODE parameter (15.02) to 22. This action is completed, when theDRIVE MODE parameter has changed back to 0.

The type code specific parameters stored into the SDCS-CON-2’s parameterFLASH memory are displayed in the signals:4.04 CONV NOM VOLT nominal converter voltage4.05 CONV NOM CURR nominal converter current4.14 CONVERTER TYPE converter type4.15 QUADRANT TYPE quadrant type4.16 CONV OVCUR LEVEL current tripping level4.17 MAX BRIDGE TEMP tripping level of heat sink temperature

Note: If the jumper field S2 of SDCS-CON-2 has the pins 1-2 connected, theSDCS-CON-2 software uses always the default parameters. To get the typecode parameters stored in the parameter FLASH-memory active, the pins 3-4of the jumper field S2 must be connected.

3.6.2 Software UpdateIf the parameter structure of a new software version loaded to the SDCS-CON-2 board is different from the one loaded previously (meaning: there are new ordeleted parameters), the jumper field S2 must have the pins 1-2 connected(jumpers must be set before power-up), until the new default parameters have



been stored to the parameter FLASH-memory (by setting DRIVE MODE (15.02)to 22). Afterwards, the jumper must be set back to 3-4 (to get the parametersout of the parameter FLASH-memory active on next power-up).Note: Previously made parameter changes will be lost after this procedure.

In case one doesn’t know, if the new software version has different parameterstructure, it is strongly recommended to assume, it has different structure.


4 Chapter 4 - Co ntrol Operation

4.1 OverviewThis chapter describes the Actual Signals, the Fault History and explainsKeypad and External control.

4.2 Actual Signals (Group 1)Actual Signals monitor DCC 600 functions. They do not affect theperformance of the DCC 600. Actual Signal values are measured orcalculated by the drive and they cannot be set by the user

The Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel continuouslydisplays three actual signals. When the ACT key is pressed, the full nameof the three Actual Signals will be displayed. When the key is released,the short name (8 characters) and the value are displayed.

Figure 4-1 Actual Signal Display Mode.

Table 4-1 on the next page lists the Actual Signals: selected or monitoredvalues, and functions.

To select the actual values to be displayed follow the proceduredescribed in Chapter 2 - Overview of DCC 600 Programming, Table 2-3,page 2-6.

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

Chapter 4 - Control Operation


Table 4-1 Group 1, Actual Signals

Actual Signals(Group 1)

Range/Unit Description

1 MOTOR SPEED Rpm Selected motor speed value (filteredaccording to par. 23.5).

2 MOTOR SPEED FILT rpm Filtered motor speed value.

3 ARM VOLT ACT V Armature voltage of the motor

4 CONV CUR ACT A Actual armature current.+ : Motoring- : Generating

5 MOTOR TORQUEFILT

% Filtered motor torque.

6 FIELD CUR M1 A Filtered field current of motor 1.

7 FIELD CUR M2 A Filtered field current of motor 2.

8 MAINS VOLT ACT V Actual mains voltage.

9 EMF VOLT ACT V Actual motor EMF voltage.

10 HEAT SINK TEMP deg C Temperature of the coolingelement.

11 MOTOR SELECTED MOTOR 1;MOTOR 2

Motor selected.

12 SPEED REF Rpm Speed reference before ramp.

13 CTRL LOCATION LOCAL; I/O CTRL;FIELDBUS; M/FCTRL

Active control location.

14 TIME OF USAGE Hours Elapsed time meter.

15 CONTROL MODE SPEED CONT;TORQUE CONT

Used control mode.

17 DI8-2 STATUS Status of digital inputs.

18 AN IN 1 VALUE V Value of analogue input 1.



21 DO8-4 STATUS Status of digital outputs.

24 TOTAL INERTIA Kgm2 Calculated inertia from poweroptimisation autotune

25 EXT DI15-9 STATUS Status of IOE-1 digital inputs26 AN IN TACHOVALUE

V Value of analogue tacho input.

27 SQUARE WAVE Output signal square wave gen.28 ARM L Rel inductance of the arm circuit.29 ARM R Rel resistance of the arm circuit.30 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN

P-gain of PI curr. Controller



Actual Signals(Group 1)

Range/Unit Description

31 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI curr.Controller

32 DISCONT CURLIMIT

%Ic Curr. Level between discontinuousand continuous curr.

4.3 Description of the Actual Signals (Group 1)

1 MOTOR SPEED Displays the speed of the motor, as measured by the DCC 600 perselection parameter 50.3 . The speed is displayed in rpm and filteredaccording to parameter 23.5 .

2 MOTOR SPEED FILT Displays a filtered value of the actual speed of the motor, as measured bythe DCC 600 per selection parameter 50.3 . Filtered with 200 ms +parameter 23.5 filtering. The speed is displayed in rpm.

3 ARM VOLT ACT Actual armature voltage of the motor. Displayed in Volts.

4 CONV CUR ACT Actual converter armature current of the motor. Displayed in Amps.

5 MOTOR TORQUE FILT Filtered motor torque in percent (%) of the motor’s nominal torque. Filtertime constant: 42.12.Note: Motor nominal torque (Nm) = 9550 * Motor nominal power (kW) /Motor nominal speed (rpm) = 9550 * Umot * Imot / nmot / 1000 = 9550 *(par. 99.05) * (par. 99.06) / (par. 99.8 field weakening point) / 1000.

6 FIELD CUR M1 Filtered field current of motor 1. Filtered with 500 ms. Displayed in Amps.

7 FIELD CUR M2 Filtered field current of motor 2. Filtered with 500 ms. Displayed in Amps.

8 MAINS VOLT ACT Displays the mains voltage, as measured by the DCC 600. The voltage isdisplayed in Volts.

9 EMF VOLT ACT Actual motor EMF voltage. Displayed in Volts.

10 HEAT SINK TEMP Displays the temperature of the heatsink in degrees centigrade.

11 MOTOR SELECTED Indicates which motor is selected.

12 SPEED REF Displays the value of the total speed reference before ramp in %. 100 %corresponds to SPEED SCALING RPM, parameter 69.1 (if Motor 1), or toSPEED SCALE RPM 2, par. 80.24 (if Motor 2).

13 CTRL LOCATION Displays the active control location. Alternatives are: LOCAL, I/O CTRL,FIELDBUS and M/F CTRL. Refer to Keypad vs. External Control in thischapter.

14 TIME OF USAGE This Actual Signal is an elapsed-time indicator.

15 CONTROL MODE Used control mode:

SPEED CONT: speed control

TORQUE CONT: torque control



17 DI8-2 STATUS Status of the six digital inputs. If the input is connected to voltage(48/115/230 V), the display will indicate 1. If the input is not connected,the display will be 0.

18 AN IN 1 VALUE Value of analogue input 1 displayed in volts.



21 DO8-4 STATUS Status of the digital outputs. “1” indicates that the output is energised and“0” indicates that the output is de-energised.

24 TOTAL INERTIA This actual signal gives the calculated inertia value from running thePower Optimisation Autotune and has to be set in parameter 68.4INERTIA TOTAL UP and 68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN.

25 EXT DI15-9 STATUS Status of the seven digital inputs of optional board IOE-1. If the input isconnected to voltage, the display will indicate 1. If the input is notconnected, the display will be 0. Note: The most righthand digitrepresents digital input 9.

26 AN IN TACHO VALUE Voltage measured at the analogue tacho input. Displayed in Volts.

27 SQUARE WAVE Output signal of the square wave generator.

28 ARM L Relative inductance of the motor armature circuit, as calculated by theautotuning function.

29 ARM R Relative resistance of the motor armature circuit, as calculated by theautotuning function.

30 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN P-gain of PI armature current controller, as calculated by the autotuningfunction.

31 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI armature current controller, as calculated bythe autotuning function.

32 DISCONT CUR LIMIT Current level between discontinuous and continuous current, ascalculated by the autotuning function.



4.4 Int Actuals (Group 2)

Table 4-2 Group 2, Internal Signals

Signal name Range/Unit Description INT ACTUALS (Group 2)1 SPEED REF 2 Rpm Ramp input reference limited by speed limits

(parameters 20.1 & 20.2)2 SPEED REF 3 Rpm Ramp output reference3 SPEED REF 4 rpm Total speed reference = ramp output reference +

speed correction reference4 SPEED ERROR NEG rpm Actual speed - total speed reference5 TORQUE PROP REF % TN Speed controller proportional part output6 TORQUE INTEG REF % TN Speed controller integration part output9 TORQUE REF 1 % TN Torque reference input to drive (torque ramp output)10 TORQUE REF 2 % TN Speed controller total output + acceleration

compensation reference.Limited with parameters 20.4 & 20.5

11 TORQUE REF 3 % Output of "Torque Selector", see parameter 72.214 TORQ USED REF % Final torque reference used by torque controller

(Torque ref 5 with limits)15 MOTOR TORQUE % Actual motor torque (unfiltered)16 FIRING ANGLE Deg Thyristor firing angle (alpha).17 MEASURED SPEED rpm Speed measured by pulse encoder.18 POS ACT PPU +/- 32767 Position measurement value (scaled with parameter

70.1)19 START True; False Start-order from I/O or Fieldbus20 RUNNING True; False Drive running acknowledgment21 BRAKE LIFT True; False Brake lift order22 FAULT True; False Drive fault indication (tripped)23 APPL DUTY % Application sw CPU load of AMC-DC24 SPEED CORR rpm Speed correction reference25 POWOP SPEEDREF % Power optimisation calculated reference.(% of 69.1)26 REL FIELD CUR M1 % Unfiltered field current of motor 1 (in % of parameter

41.3)27 REL FIELD CUR M2 % Unfiltered field current of motor 2 (in % of parameter

41.17)



4.5 Fieldbus Words (Group 3)

Table 4-3 Group 3, Fieldbus words

Signal name Range/Unit Description FIELDBUS WORDS(Group 3)1 FB STATUS WORD 0 – FFFF Packed

boolean (Hex)Fieldbus Status Word, Dataset 2 Word 1, for bitdetails see section 5.6.12

2 FB FAULT WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packedboolean (Hex)

Fieldbus Fault Word 1, Dataset 6 Word 1, for bitdetails see section 5.6.12





5 FB FAULT WORD 4 0-FFFF Packedboolean (Hex)


6 FB ALARM WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packedboolean (Hex)

Fieldbus Alarm Word 1, Dataset 10 Word 1, for bitdetails see section 5.6.12

7 FB ALARM WORD 2 0 – FFFF Packedboolean (Hex)

Fieldbus Alarm Word 2, Dataset 10 Word 2, for bitdetails see section 5.6.12

8 FB COMMANDWORD

0 – FFFF Packedboolean (Hex)

Fieldbus Command Word, Dataset 1 Word 1, forbit details see section 5.6.12

9 FB SPEED REF % Fieldbus Speed reference, Dataset 1 Word 2

4.6 Information Signals (Group 4)

Table 4-4 Group 4, Information signals

Signal name Range/Unit Description INFORMATION(Group 4)1 SW PACKAGE VER Name of the type of drive software package2 DC VERSION Version of the loaded control sw (AMC-DC)3 APPLIC NAME Name of the loaded FCB application sw4 CONV NOM VOLT V Converter nominal voltage5 CONV NOM CURR A Converter nominal current6 FEX 1 CODE Field exciter 1 type coding7 FEX 2 CODE Field exciter 2 type coding8 FEX 1 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 19 FEX 2 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 210 BOOT SWVERSION

Boot sw revision of SDCS-CON-2

11 CONV SWVERSION

Converter control sw revision of SDCS-CON-2

12 APPLIC VERSION Date of the loaded FCB application sw13 BASELIBVERSION

Version of the application function block library

14 CONVERTERTYPE

Recognized converter type

15 QUADRANT TYPE Recognized converter quadrant type16 CONV OVCURLEVEL

A Converter overcurrent tripping level



Signal name Range/Unit Description17 MAX BRIDGETEMP

Cels Thyristor cooler temperature tripping level

18 FEX 1 COMMSTATUS

Timeout status of field exc. 1 comm. link

19 FEX 2 COMMSTATUS

Timeout status of field exc. 2 comm. link

20 FEX 1 COMMERRORS

No. of comm. errors in field exc.1 Comm. link

21 FEX 2 COMMERRORS

No. of comm. errors in field exc. 2 comm. link

23 CON SWPRERELEASE

Converter ocntrol sw pre-release of SDCS-CON-2

24 AMC SWPRERELEASE

Drive control sw pre-release of SDCS-AMC-DC

4.7 Drive Logic Sigs (Group 6)

Table 4-5 Group 6, Drive Logic Signals

Signal name Range/Unit Description DRIVE LOGIC SIGS(Group 6)1 CURR CONTROLSTAT

0 – FFFF Packedboolean (Hex)

Internal status of the current controller.

2 COMMISS STATUS 0 … 32767 Commissioning status of the SDCS-CON-2software (For details, see section 3.4.1).

5 CON2 BITS 0 – FFFF Packedboolean (Hex)

This packed binary signal includes boolean signalsfrom the SDCS-CON-2 board’s software. It is readfrom the SDCS-CON-2 board every 8 ms.



4.8 Fault HistoryThe Fault History includes information on the 24 most recent faults andwarnings that occurred in the DCC 600. The description of the fault andthe total power-on time are available. The power-on time is calculatedalways when the DCC 600 is powered.

Chapter 2 - Overview of DCC 600 Programming, Table 2-4, page 2-7,describes how to display and clear the Fault History from the ControlPanel.

4.9 Local Control vs. External ControlThe DCC 600 can be controlled (i.e. reference, ON/OFF and Startcommands can be given) from an external control location or from Localcontrol (Control Panel Keypad or a DrivesWindow PC tool). Figure 4-2below shows the DCC 600 control locations.

The selection between Keypad control and External control can be donewith the LOC REM key on the Control Panel keypad.

Keypad reference(rpm)

Fieldbus communication

Stand aloneI/O

ON/START, Speed ref (%) ON/START Speed ref (%)

Figure 4-2 Control Locations

If the device controlling the DCC 600 stops communicating, theoperation defined by Parameter 30.12 MASTER FAULT FUNC, or30.2 PANEL LOSS is executed.

4.9.1 Keypad ControlThe control commands are given from the Control Panel keypad whenDCC 600 is in Keypad Control. This is indicated by L (Local) on theControl Panel display.

6 \ZW

If operational commands and reference cannot be given from this ControlPanel, it displays a blank character as shown below.

\ZW



4.9.2 External ControlWhen the DCC 600 is in External Control, the commands are given eitherfrom Fieldbus or I/O (Stand Alone mode). Selection is done withparameter 64.1 Stand Alone Sel.

Stand alone

If par. Stand Alone Sel (parameter 64.1) is set True (default value) theStand Alone mode is selected.

In external control the digital inputs DI 2, DI 6 - DI 8 and Ext DI 9 – DI15as well as analog inputs AI1 & AI2 are connected to a CRANE functionmodule.

The CRANE function module is producing the references and commandslike ON/OFF, START and so on.

Fieldbus

When the DCC 600 is in Fieldbus mode (64.1 Stand Alone Sel=False) thecommands are given from the supervisory system and received over thefield bus communication link.


5 Chapter 5 - Crane Program Description

5.1 Overview This chapter describes the functionality of the Crane program with its twoApplication Macros: CRANE and M/F CTRL, and the two external controlmodes: Field bus mode and Stand Alone mode.The chapter also describes how to use the two User Macros.

The chapter contains the following information:• Application Macro information• Operation, Fieldbus and Stand alone mode• External I/O Connections• Parameter Settings• Functional Block diagram of program• Function module descriptions

The Parameter Settings tables in this chapter indicate parameters youmay have to modify. These parameters are indicated in the tables withan arrow (-->) symbol.

Refer to Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings for the alternativesettings for each parameter.

5.2 Application MacrosThere are two application macros: CRANE and M/F CTRL.Selection is done with parameter 99.2 Application macro.Default setting is CRANE macro.

CRANE macro includes all the crane software functions except theMaster/Follower bus functionality.

M/F CTRL macro includes all functions of the CRANE macro plusMaster/Follower bus functionality (see description of function module"Master/Follower (72)").

NOTE: A change of application macro will reset all parameter settings todefault, except for parameter group 99. Therefore macro selectionshould be done before making the application parameter settings.

Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description


5.3 Stand alone mode operationAll drive commands and reference settings can be given from the ControlPanel keypad or selectively from an external control location.

The active control location is selected with the LOC REM key on theControl Panel keypad. The drive is speed controlled.

In External Control the control location is the basic I/O. The referencesignal is connected to analogue input AI1 and On/Start and Directionsignals are generated from digital inputs DI2 ... DI8.

One DI is used for connecting slowdown limit switches in series, and oneDI for Fast Stop order from mechanical overload and slack ropeindications.

The mechanical brake is controlled from e.g. DO4 and theacknowledgement is connected to e.g. DI6.

Two analogue and Five digital output signals are available on terminalblocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the ControlPanel are SPEED, TORQUE and CURRENT.

The feedback data through Fieldbus communication: drive -> PLC isavailable also in stand alone mode (by enabling Comm module;parameter 98.2).

EMBEDOperation Diagram

~

InputPower

Speed

Torque

Motor

Brake

M

rpm

Nm

Ext. Controls

RelayOutputs

Reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from theControl Panel. To change to External ctrl, press LOC REM key atstandstill.

Speed reference is read from analogue input AI1 (Terminal BlockX21). On/Start and Direction commands are generated from digitalinputs DI7 and DI8.

Figure 5-1 Operation Diagram for Stand Alone Mode.

5.3.1 Input and Output I/O SignalsInput and Output I/O Signals as default assigned by the Crane program.(For more details see Crane module (64) description page 5-18):

Input Signals Output SignalsBrake Ackn: (DI6)Zero Pos: (DI2)Start Dir A: (DI7)Start Dir B: (DI8)Slow Down-N: (DI9)Fast Stop-N: (DI10)Speed Ref: (AI1)Torque Ref: (AI2)Speed Corr: (AI3)

Analogue Output AO1: Not selectedAnalogue Output AO2: Not selectedRelay Output DO4: Brake liftRelay Output DO5: Watch dog-N

6 \Z =://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

\ZW =://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+



5.3.2 External ConnectionsThe following connection example is applicable when the Crane programwith Stand Alone control mode and Joystick control is used.

TerminalIOB-21 &CON-2

X6:1

X6:2

X6:3

X6:4

X6:5

X6:6

X6:7

X6:8

X7:3,4

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 8

+48V

Function

Converter Fan ackn. (fixed)

Zero Pos

Main Contactor Ackn. (fixed)

Electrical disconnect (fixed)

Not used

Brake Acknowledge (def.)

Start Dir A

Start Dir B

IOB-21: 48Vdc, max 50 mA

X6:9 +48V CON-2: 48Vdc, max 50 mA

TerminalIOB-1 24V

X1:1

X1:2

X1:3

X1:4

X1:5

X1:6

X1:7

X1:8

X1:9

DI 9

DI 10

DI 11

DI 12

DI 13

DI 14

DI 15

Function

Slow down limits

FAST STOP-N

STEP REF 2

STEP REF 3

OV for DI9-12

STEP REF 4

OV for DI13-15

Figure 5-2 External DI connections to DCC 600 in Stand Alone mode,Joystick control.



Reverse

Com.

TerminalIOB-3

X4:7

X4:8

X3:4

X3:3

X3:6

X3:5

X3:8

X3:7

X4:1

TerminalCON-2

X4:4

X4:3

X3:6

X3:5

X3:8

X3:7

X3:10

X3:9

X4:7

Function

Reference voltage 10 VDCmax 5 mA

Speed reference0…10V <-> 0 …100%

Torque reference0…10V <-> 0 …Tmax

Speed Correction+/-10V <-> +/- 100%

Speed-10V … +10V <-> -100 …100%

X4:2 X4:6

TerminalIOB-21

X4:1X4:2

DO 1

Function

Converter Fan order (fixed)

X4:3X4:4

DO 2 Field exciter order (fixed)

X4:5X4:6

DO 3 Main Contactor order X4:6 (fixed)

X4:7X4:8

DO 4 Brake lift (def.)

X5:1X5:2

DO 5 Watchdog_N (def.)

X5:3X5:4

DO 6 ”Programmable”

X5:5X5:6


X5:7X5:8


+24V

FanContactor

Field exc.Contactor

BrakeContactor

E-StopContactor

Vref.

GND

AI 1+

AI 1-

AI 2+

AI 2-

AI3+

AI3-

AO1+

AO1-

X4:3 X4:8 Torque-10V …+10V <-> -Tn…+Tn

X4:4 X4:6

AO2+

AO2-

rpm

Nm

Forward

TE

TE

Figure 5-3 External AI, AO and DO connections to DCC600 in StandAlone mode, Joystick control.



5.3.3 Control Signals Connection Stand Alone mode

REF

LOC

REM

CDP 312

PANEL

SPEEDCONTROLER

MINIMUM SPEED 20.1MAXIMUM SPEED 20.2

SPEED CTRL

Group 23

MAX

Power

Optimization

CRANE

MODULE

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

SPEED

REFAI.1

DI 2, DI 6-8Ext DI 9-15

TORQUECONTROLLER

TORQUE CTRL

Group 24

MAXIMUM

TORQUEAI.2

TORQUE

ON/START

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

REF. WITH SIGN.

STAND

ALONE

SELECTOR

SPEED CORRCOAI 3

SPEED

TORQUE

1

0

Figure 5-4 Control Signals Connection Stand Alone mode



5.3.4 Parameter Settings for the Stand alone mode

→ Typical parameter values to check during start-up. If required, alter thevalues to meet the needs of your application. A complete parameter list isprovided in Appendix A.

Table 5-1 Listing of parameters typically requiring changes during startup. Stand alone mode.

99 START-UP DATA 28 MOTOR PROTECTION99.2 APPLICATION MACRO CRANE 28.1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC →240 s99.3 APPLIC RESTORE NO 28.2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR →100 %Im99.5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE →350.0 V 28.3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 120 %99.6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT →0.0 A 28.4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 130 %99.8 MOTOR NOM SPEED →1500.0 rpm 28.5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 240 s99.9 DEVICE NAME “Device name” 28.6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 100 %Im

28.7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 120 %10 DIGITAL INPUTS 28.8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 130 %10.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL DI6 28.9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED10.2 ZERO POS SEL →NOT USED 28.10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx10.3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL →NOT USED 28.11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx10.4 FAST STOP-N SEL →NOT USED 28.12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED10.6 SYNC SEL NOT USED 28.13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx10.8 STEP REF2 SEL NOT USED 28.14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx10.9 STEP REF3 SEL NOT USED 28.18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED10.10 STEP REF4 SEL NOT USED 28.19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL →NOT USED10.11 HIGH SPEED SEL NOT USED 28.20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM 4 A10.12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL NOT USED 28.21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL 10 ms10.13 ACCELERATE SEL NOT USED 28.22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV 150.0 %Us

28.23 SPD MEAS MON LEV 15.0 rpm15 DRIVE LOGIC PAR 28.24 SPD EMF MON LEV 50.0 V15.2 DRIVE MODE 0 28.25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED15.3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE15.4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT 41 MOTOR NOM VAL15.5 USED FEX TYPE →0 41.3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR →0.3 A15.6 FIELD CONTRL MODE →FIX 41.10 CUR REF SLOPE 10 %/ms15.7 EXT FAN ACK MODE NO SUPERVIS 41.11 ARM L →0.015.10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED 41.12 ARM R →0.015.11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.14 FLD CUR@ 40% FLUX 40.0%If115.12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.15 FLD CUR@ 70% FLUX 70.0%If115.17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 200 ms 41.16 FLD CUR@ 90% FLUX 90.0%If115.18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED 41.17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A15.19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 100 ms 41.19 INT EMF REF →105.0 %Us

42 MEASUREMENT20 LIMITS 42.1 MAINS PHASE ORDER R – S – T20.1 MINIMUM SPEED →-1500 rpm 42.5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 230 %20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED →1500 rpm 42.6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT → (Rated) or (42.08)20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE →100.0 %TN 42.7 S CONV NOM CURR 0 A20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE →-100.0%TN 42.8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0 V20.12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDG →100.0 %Im 42.9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP 0 Cels20.13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDG →-100.0 %Im 42.10 S CONVERTER TYPE NONE20.14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 150 deg 42.11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE20.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 15 deg 42.12 TORQ ACT FTC 200 ms20.16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If120.17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If2 43 CURRENT CONTROL

43.2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN →300.023 SPEED CTRL 43.3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN →3200.023.1 KPS →10.0 43.6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT →50.0%Ic23.2 TIS →300 ms 43.10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT23.3 DERIVATION TIME 0 ms 43.11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0.7 %Ic23.4 ACC COMP DER TIME 0 s 43.12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 25.0 %Ic23.5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 ms 43.15 REV GAP 023.6 SPEED STEP (only for DW) 0 rpm

44 FIELD EXCITATION44.1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0.044.2 P-GAIN FEX 1 →1.044.3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 →200.0 ms44.7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0.044.8 P-GAIN FEX 2 1.044.9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 200.0 ms44.13 FIELD 1 REF RED 30.0 %If144.17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If144.21 FIELD 2 REF RED 30.0 %If244.22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If2



46 EMF CONTROL 70 POS MEASURE46.1 POS LIM EMF CON 10.0 %Fn 70.1 POS SCALE 100.00 PPU46.2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100.0 %Fn 70.2 SYNC COND Pos46.3 EMF CON KP →15046.4 EMF CON KI →5000 71 FIELDBUS COMM46.5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV 2 % 71.1 COMTEST FLT TD 300 ms46.6 EMF ACT FILT TC 10 ms 71.4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE46.9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 10 ms46.11 V STEP 0% 72 MASTER / FOLLOWER

72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE OFF50 SPEED MEASURING 72.2 TORQUE SELECTOR ZERO50.2 SPEED MEAS MODE A _-_ B _-_ 72.3 LOAD SHARE 100.0 %50.3 SPEED FB SEL →CALC BY EMF 72.4 WINDOW SEL ON OFF50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR →1024 72.5 WINDOW WIDTH POS 0.0 rpm50.6 SPACT FILT TIME 0ms 72.6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG 0.0 rpm

72.7 DROOP RATE 0.00 %62 TORQUE MONITOR 72.8 TORQ REF A FTC 0 ms62.1 TORQ MON SEL True 72.9 M/F FAULT TD 200 ms62.2 SP DEV LEV 10 % 72.10 M/F COMM ERR TD 200 ms62.3 TORQ FLT TD 600 ms 72.11 MF BROADCAST MODE NO62.4 SP DER BLK LEV *) →8 %/s

80 SHARED MOTION63 FAST STOP 80.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL2 DI863.1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 NOT USED 80.2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED63.2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 →NOT USED 80.3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 BRAKE LIFT

80.4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 -100.0%TN64 CRANE 80.5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 -100.0%TN64.1 STAND ALONE SEL True 80.6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 100.0%Im64.2 CONTIN GEAR False 80.7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 -100.0%Im64.3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 98.0 % 80.8 KPS 2 10.064.4 DEADZONE A →0 % 80.9 TIS 2 300 ms64.5 DEADZONE B →0 % 80.10 ARM L 2 0.064.6 REF SHAPE 20 80.11 ARM R 2 0.064.7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF →25 % 80.12 INT EMF REF 2 105.0%Us64.8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.3 s 80.13 ARM CUR PI PGAIN2 300.064.9 TORQUE REF SCALE 1.00 80.14 ARM CUR PI IGAIN2 3200.064.10 CONTROL TYPE →JOYSTICK 80.15 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 50.0%Ic64.11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 % 80.16 SPEED FR SEL 2 CALC BY EMF64.12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 400 ms 80.17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 1.0%64.13 STEP REF LEVEL 1 10.0 % 80.18 SP DEV LEV 2 10%64.14 STEP REF LEVEL 2 25.0 % 80.19 TORQ FLT TD 2 600ms64.15 STEP REF LEVEL 3 50.0 % 80.20 SP DER BLK LEV 2 8%/s64.16 STEP REF LEVEL 4 100.0 % 80.21 TORQ PROV SEL 2 False

80.22 POWOP SELECT 2 False66 TORQUE PROVING 80.23 BASE SPEED 2 100.0%66.1 TORQ PROV SEL →False 80.24 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 1500rpm66.2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.5 s 80.25 ACC TIME FORW 2 5.0 s66.3 TORQ PROV REF 20.0 % 80.26 ACC TIME REV 2 5.0 s66.4 REGEN TEST SEL True 80.27 DEC TIME FORW 2 5.0 s

80.28 DEC TIME REV 2 5.0 s68 POWER OPTIMIZE 80.29 SPEED REF TD 2 0.05 s68.1 POWOP SELECT →False 80.30 START TORQ SEL 2 NOT USED68.2 BASE SPEED →100.0 % 80.31 POS SCALE 2 100.00PPU68.3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL False 80.32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 350.0 V68.4 INERTIA TOTAL UP 3.00 kgm2 80.33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 0.0A68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN →3.00 kgm2 80.34 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2 1500.0 rpm68.6 TQLIM UP →100.0 % 80.35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD 0.3s68.7 TQLIM DWN →75.0 %68.8 POWOP RESET LEV 12 % 92 DATASET TR ADDR

92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 20269 REFERENCE HANDLER 92.2 DATASET 4 WORD 2 21869.1 SPEED SCALING RPM →1500 rpm 92.3 DATASET 4 WORD 3 10469.2 ACC TIME FORW →5.0 s69.3 ACC TIME REV →5.0 s 98 OPTION MODULES69.4 DEC TIME FORW →5.0 s 98.2 COMM MODULE NO69.5 DEC TIME REV →5.0 s 98.3 CH3 NODE ADDR 169.6 S-RAMP TC 0.0 s 98.4 CH0 NODE ADDR 169.7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 2 .0 98.8 IO BOARD CONFIG →IOB2+369.8 SPEED REF TD →0.05 s69.9 START TORQ SEL →NOT USED69.10 RAMP RATE=1 True

*) ondsintimeramplongestRTwheresRT

asCalculate sec,/%5.1

100: =

×



5.4 Fieldbus mode operationAll drive commands and reference settings can be given from the ControlPanel keypad or selectively from an external control location.

The active control location is selected with the LOC REM key on theControl Panel keypad. The drive is normally speed controlled.

In External Control the control location is from the Fieldbuscommunication. The reference signal, On/Start a.s.o. are connected tocorresponding datasets, see Fieldbus Receive description for details.

The mechanical brake is controlled from DO4 and the acknowledgementis connected to DI6 as a default.Example of digital input connections:DI7 Sync, is position measurement synchronisation. DI4 is electricaldisconnect.

Two analogue and five digital output signals are available on terminalblocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the ControlPanel are SPEED, TORQUE and CURRENT.

Operation Diagram

~

InputPower

Speed

Torque

Motor

Brake

M

rpm

Nm

RelayOutputs

Fieldbus comm.module

Reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given fromthe Control Panel. To change to External ctrl, press LOC REM keyat standstill.

Start/Stop commands and References are received through theFieldbus communication.

Figure 5-5 Operation Diagram for Fieldbus Mode.

5.4.1 Input and Output I/O SignalsExample of Input and Output I/O Signals selected in Fieldbus mode, i.e.supervisory controller (PLC) is used:

Input Signals Output SignalsBrake Ackn: (DI6)El disc.: (DI4)Sync: (DI7)

Analogue Output AO1: Not selectedAnalogue Output AO2: Not selectedRelay Output DO4: Brake liftRelay Output DO5: Watchdog-N

6 \ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+

\ZW=://.!\ZW>9<;?/-?<</8>+



5.4.2 External ConnectionsThe following connection example is applicable when the Crane programis used in Fieldbus mode.

Com.

TerminalIOB-21 &CON-2

X6:1

X6:2

X6:3

X6:4

X6:5

X6:6

X6:7

X6:8

X7:3,4

DI 1

DI 2

DI 3

DI 4

DI 5

DI 6

DI 7

DI 8

+48V

Function

Converter Fan ackn. (fixed)

Main Contactor Ackn. (fixed)

Electrical disconnect (fixed)

Not used (Emerg. Stop)

Brake Acknowledge (def.)

Sync.

IOB-21: 48Vdc, max 50 mA

X6:9 +48V CON-2: 48Vdc, max 50 mA

TerminalIOB-21

X4:1X4:2

DO 1

Function

Converter Fan order (fixed)

X4:3X4:4

DO 2 Field exciter order (fixed)

X4:5X4:6

DO 3 Main Contactor order X4:6 (fixed)

X4:7X4:8

DO 4 Brake lift (def.)

X5:1X5:2

DO 5 Watchdog_N (def.)

X5:3X5:4


X5:5X5:6


X5:7X5:8


+24V

FanContactor

Field exc.Contactor

BrakeContactor

E-StopContactor

Figure 5-6 External connections in Fieldbus mode



5.4.3 Control Signals Connection in Field Bus Mode

Figure 5-7 Control Signals Connection in Fieldbus mode

CDP312PANEL

REF

LOC

REM

1

0

FIELD BUS

DataSet1, Word1Bit 2 and 4

DataSet1,Word2

DS1.1 Bit 7

DataSet1,Word3

DS3,2

SPEED REF.

SELECTTORQ. CTRL

TORQUEREF.

SPEED CORR.

PowerOptimization

MAXSELECTOR

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

REF. WITH SIGN.

KEYPAD

EXTERNAL

ON/START

SPEED CONTROLLER

MINIMUM SPEED 20.1MAXIMUM SPEED 20.2

SPEED CTRLGroup 23

MAXIMUMTORQUE 20.4

TORQUE CTRLGroup 24

TORQUE CONTROLLER



5.4.4 Speed correction in Fieldbus mode

In Fieldbus mode there is a possibility to send a speed correctionreference ("non-ramped" reference added to ramp unit output), to thedrive:

In the Fieldbus communication interface: DataSet 3, Word 2 is connectedas a Speed Correction input signal (10 ms updating time).

The speed correction reference is limited so that the sum of the normal"ramped" speed reference and the speed correction reference cannotexceed Maximum/Minimum Speed setting (parameters 20.1 & 20.2).



5.4.5 Parameter Settings for the Fieldbus mode

→ Typical parameter values to check during start-up. If required, alter thevalues to meet the needs of your application. A complete parameter list isprovided in Appendix A.

Table 5-2 Parameter Settings for the Fieldbus mode99 START-UP DATA 28 MOTOR PROTECTION99.2 APPLICATION MACRO CRANE 28.1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC →240 s99.3 APPLIC RESTORE NO 28.2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR →100 %Im99.5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE →350.0 V 28.3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 120 %99.6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT →0.0 A 28.4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 130 %99.8 MOTOR NOM SPEED →1500.0 rpm 28.5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 240 s99.9 DEVICE NAME “Device name” 28.6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 100 %Im

28.7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 120 %10 DIGITAL INPUTS 28.8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 130 %10.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL DI6 28.9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED10.2 ZERO POS SEL NOT USED 28.10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx10.3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL NOT USED 28.11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx10.4 FAST STOP-N SEL NOT USED 28.12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED10.6 SYNC SEL →NOT USED 28.13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx10.8 STEP REF2 SEL NOT USED 28.14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx10.9 STEP REF3 SEL NOT USED 28.18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED10.10 STEP REF4 SEL NOT USED 28.19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL →NOT USED10.11 HIGH SPEED SEL NOT USED 28.20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM 4 A10.12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL →NOT USED 28.21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL 10 ms10.13 ACCELERATE SEL NOT USED 28.22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV 150.0 %Us

28.23 SPD MEAS MON LEV 15.0 rpm15 DRIVE LOGIC PAR 28.24 SPD EMF MON LEV 50.0 V15.2 DRIVE MODE 0 28.25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED15.3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE15.4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT 41 MOTOR NOM VAL15.5 USED FEX TYPE →0 41.3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR →0.3 A15.6 FIELD CONTRL MODE →FIX 41.10 CUR REF SLOPE 10 %/ms15.7 EXT FAN ACK MODE NO SUPERVIS 41.11 ARM L →0.015.10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED 41.12 ARM R →0.015.11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.14 FLD CUR@ 40% FLUX 40.0%If115.12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.15 FLD CUR@ 70% FLUX 70.0%If115.17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 200 ms 41.16 FLD CUR@ 90% FLUX 90.0%If115.18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED 41.17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A15.19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 100 ms 41.19 INT EMF REF →105.0 %Us

20 LIMITS 42 MEASUREMENT

20.1 MINIMUM SPEED →-1500 rpm 42.1 MAINS PHASE ORDER R – S – T20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED →1500 rpm 42.5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 230 %20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE →100.0 %TN 42.6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT → (Rated) or (42.08)20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE →-100.0%TN 42.7 S CONV NOM CURR 0 A20.12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDG →100.0 %Im 42.8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0 V20.13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDG →-100.0 %Im 42.9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP 0 Cels20.14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 150 deg 42.10 S CONVERTER TYPE NONE20.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 15 deg 42.11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE20.16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If1 42.12 TORQ ACT FTC 200 ms20.17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If2

43 CURRENT CONTROL

23 SPEED CTRL 43.2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN →300.023.1 KPS →10.0 43.3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN →3200.023.2 TIS →300 ms 43.6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT →50.0%Ic23.3 DERIVATION TIME 0 ms 43.10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT23.4 ACC COMP DER TIME 0 s 43.11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0.7 %Ic23.5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 ms 43.12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 25.0 %Ic23.6 SPEED STEP (only for DW) 0 rpm 43.15 REV GAP 0

44 FIELD EXCITATION

44.1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0.044.2 P-GAIN FEX 1 →1.044.3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 →200.0 ms44.7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0.044.8 P-GAIN FEX 2 1.044.9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 200.0 ms44.13 FIELD 1 REF RED 30.0 %If144.17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If144.21 FIELD 2 REF RED 30.0 %If244.22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If2



46 EMF CONTROL 66 TORQUE PROVING46.1 POS LIM EMF CON 10.0 %Fn 66.1 TORQ PROV SEL →False46.2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100.0 %Fn 66.2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.5 s46.3 EMF CON KP →150 66.3 TORQ PROV REF 20.0 %46.4 EMF CON KI →5000 66.4 REGEN TEST SEL True46.5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV 2 % 68 POWER OPTIMIZE46.6 EMF ACT FILT TC 10 ms 68.1 POWOP SELECT →False46.9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 10 ms 68.2 BASE SPEED →100.0 %46.11 V STEP 0% 68.3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL False

68.4 INERTIA TOTAL UP →3.00 kgm250 SPEED MEASURING 68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN →3.00 kgm250.2 SPEED MEAS MODE A _-_ B _-_ 68.6 TQLIM UP →100.0 %50.3 SPEED FB SEL →CALC BY EMF 68.7 TQLIM DWN →75.0 %50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR →1024 68.8 POWOP RESET LEV 12 %50.6 SPACT FILT TIME 0ms

69 REFERENCE HANDLER51 MASTER ADAPTER 69.1 SPEED SCALING RPM →1500 rpm51.1 MODULE TYPE (module type) 69.2 ACC TIME FORW →5.0 s51.2 … 51.15 69.3 ACC TIME REV →5.0 s

69.4 DEC TIME FORW →5.0 s62 TORQUE MONITOR 69.5 DEC TIME REV →5.0 s62.1 TORQ MON SEL True 69.6 S-RAMP TC 0.0 s62.2 SP DEV LEV 10 % 69.7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 2 .062.3 TORQ FLT TD 600 ms 69.8 SPEED REF TD →0.05 s62.4 SP DER BLK LEV *) →8 %/s 69.9 START TORQ SEL →NOT USED

69.10 RAMP RATE=1 →True63 FAST STOP63.1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 →NOT USED 70 POS MEASURE63.2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 NOT USED 70.1 POS SCALE →100.00 PPU

70.2 SYNC COND Pos64 CRANE64.1 STAND ALONE SEL !False 71 FIELDBUS COMM64.2 CONTIN GEAR False 71.1 COMTEST FLT TD 300 ms64.3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 98.0 % 71.4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE64.4 DEADZONE A 0 % 98 OPTION MODULES64.5 DEADZONE B 0 % 98.2 COMM MODULE →NO64.6 REF SHAPE 20 98.3 CH3 NODE ADDR 164.7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF 25 % 98.4 CH0 NODE ADDR →164.8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.3 s 98.8 IO BOARD CONFIG IOB2+364.9 TORQUE REF SCALE 1.0064.10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK64.11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 %64.12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 400 ms64.13 STEP REF LEVEL 1 10.0 %64.14 STEP REF LEVEL 2 25.0 %64.15 STEP REF LEVEL 3 50.0 %64.16 STEP REF LEVEL 4 100.0 %

! Parameter value different from default setting.

*) ondsintimeramplongestRTwheresRT

asCalculate sec,/%5.1

100: =

×



5.5 Function Block Diagram

FIE

LD-

BU

S

CO

MM

.

(71)

Receive

DR

IVE

ON

ST

AR

T O

VR

DR

IVE

SP

EE

D R

EF

HIG

H S

PE

ED

OK

LOA

D M

EA

S S

EL,...

RE

SE

T O

VR

MA

S O

SC

FLT

TO

RQ

RE

F

SP

EE

D C

OR

R

FA

ST

ST

OP

1, 11

BR

AK

E A

CK

N

SY

NC

CO

NT

RO

L LOC

AT

ION

ST

AR

T P

AN

EL

ST

OP

PA

NE

L

SP

EE

D R

EF

LOC

AL

PA

NE

L RE

SE

T

RE

F Z

ER

O S

ET

DR

IVE

SP

EE

D R

EF

ST

AR

T 2

RA

MP

RA

TE

LOA

D M

EA

S S

EL

SP

EE

D R

EF

LOC

AL

LOC

AL

SP

EE

D R

EF

PO

WO

P

TO

RQ

PR

OV

RE

F

SP

EE

D R

EF

3

MO

T T

OR

Q

HIG

H S

PE

ED

OK

MO

T T

OR

Q

SP

EE

D A

CT

DR

IVE

SP

EE

D R

EF

DR

IVE

SP

EE

D R

EF

ST

AR

T O

VR

ST

AR

T

HIG

H S

PE

ED

OK

HIG

H S

PE

ED

OK

TO

RQ

RE

F

TO

RQ

RE

F

SP

EE

D C

OR

R

SP

EE

D C

OR

R

SP

EE

D R

EF

TO

RQ

RE

F

SP

EE

D C

OR

R

ST

AR

T

EM

ER

G S

TO

P

FA

ULT

FA

ST

ZE

RO

SE

T

LOC

AL

LOC

AL S

TA

RT

LOC

AL S

TO

P

FA

ST

ST

OP

1

FA

ST

ST

OP

11

FA

ST

ST

OP

12

FA

ST

ZE

RO

SE

T

ST

AR

T 2

TO

RQ

PR

OV

OK

TO

RQ

PR

OV

RE

F

TO

RQ

PR

OV

FLT

RU

NN

ING

MO

T T

OR

Q

ON

SP

EE

D O

FF

FA

ST

ST

OP

EM

ER

G S

TO

P

BR

AK

E A

CK

N

RE

SE

T O

VR

ZE

RO

SP

EE

DON

RU

N

FO

RC

E S

PC

SP

C F

OR

CE

RE

F

SP

EE

D R

EF

RE

AD

Y

RD

Y F

OR

RU

N

RU

NN

ING

FO

LLOW

LIMIT

ING

SP

EE

D R

EF

3, 4

SP

EE

D A

CT

MO

T T

OR

Q

RU

NN

ING

RE

AD

Y

RD

Y F

OR

RU

N

FO

LLOW

LIMIT

ING

SP

EE

D R

EF

3

SP

EE

D A

CT

PO

S A

CT

PP

U

SY

NC

RD

Y

FA

ULT

MO

T O

VE

R S

PE

ED

TO

RQ

FLT

BR

AK

E F

LT

TO

RQ

PR

OV

FLT

MA

S O

SC

FLT

CH

OP

PE

R F

LT

RE

SE

T O

VR

PA

NE

L RE

SE

T

LOC

AL

LOC

AL S

TA

RT

LOC

AL S

TO

P

PO

S P

RE

CO

UN

T P

PU

RE

SE

T S

YN

C R

DY

HW

SY

NC

INH

IBIT

PG

M S

YN

C

SY

NC

PO

S A

CT

PP

U

SY

NC

RD

Y

SP

EE

D A

CT

SP

EE

D R

EF

4

ZE

RO

SP

EE

D

BR

AK

E LIF

T

LOG

IC

HA

ND

-

LING(65)

TO

RQ

UE

PR

OV

ING

(66)

ME

CH

.

BR

AK

E

CO

NT

R.

(67)

FIE

LD-

BU

S

CO

MM

.

(71)

FA

ST

ST

OP

(63)

PO

WE

R

OP

TIM

I-

ZA

TIO

N

(68)

RE

F

HA

ND

-

LING(69)

MO

TO

R

CO

NT

RO

L

BA

SIC

Digital

Out

Analog

Out

BR

AK

E LIF

T

(Def.on D

O4)

AO

2

AO

1

AO

2

(14)

(15)

TO

RQ

RE

F

SP

EE

D C

OR

R

TO

RQ

UE

Monitor

(62)

SP

EE

D

Monitor

(61)

PO

SIT

ION

ME

A-

SU

RIN

G

(70)

FA

ULT

Handling

FA

ULT

LOC

AL

Operation

(60)

ST

AN

D

ALO

NE

LOG

IC

AN

D

RE

F.

(64)

PA

NE

L

Digital

inputs

Analog

Digital

inputs

FIE

LD B

US

MO

DE

ST

AN

D A

LON

E M

OD

E

Transm

it

PO

S P

RE

CO

UN

T,...

BR

AK

E F

LT

ABCD

1

2

3

4

5

BR

AK

E A

CK

N

ZE

RO

PO

S

ST

AR

T D

IR A

ST

AR

T D

IR B

SLO

WD

OW

N-N

FA

ST

ST

OP

-N

FA

ST

ST

OP

12

ZE

RO

SP

EE

D

AI1

AI2

AI3

DI6

DI2

DI7

DI8

Ext D

I9

Ext D

I10

DI6

DI4

DI7

3B

2D

2D

2A

3D

1A

1A

2C

1A

1A 1A1B1D

5D

3C

1D

3D

1B

3A

3C5D

3A 4A

5D

4B

2B5A

4D

5D

2D,4A

2A,5D

3C

1B 1B

3A 5D

1B5D

4B4C

BR

AK

E LO

NG

FT

IME

5D

4A,5D

DR

IVE

ON

64.1 Stand alone select

Par

Figure 5-2 F

unctional block diagram

PO

WE

R O

N A

CK

N / E

ME

RG

ST

OP

-N3A

CR

AN

E

RD

Y F

OR

RU

N4B

(10)

(10)

inputs

Ext D

I11E

xt DI12

Ext D

I13E

xt DI14

Ext D

I15(10)

RU

N

Figure 5-8 Function Block Diagram



5.6 Function Module Description

5.6.1 Local operation ( 60 )This function module contains the necessary logic for Local modeoperation from the Control Panel. Normally used only for commissioningand maintenance. The unit gives commands: Start/stop, Speed ref local,Local/remote and Reset from the panel. All crane drive functions (suchas mechanical brake control) are active also in Local control mode(except power optimisation).

Please note that inputs for Slowdown limits, Stop limits and Faststop are NOT active when running in Local control mode.Speed correction references are not active when running in Localmode.

Parameter (60.1) LOC OPER INH = ” true ” will force the drive to externalcontrol mode (LOCAL = ” 0 ”). The drive is then only controlled from theField Bus communication or in Stand alone mode from I/O signals.

To be able to change the mode from External control to Local control orreverse the motor has to be stopped with brakes set, that is: ZEROSPEED = ”1" and RUNNING = "0".

Local running is performed from the Control Panel, which contains push-buttons for ON, OFF, START and STOP of the converter, for controllingthe speed of the motor up and down, and for Fast or Slow referencechange. Ramp times (par. 69.2 - 5) are in Local multiplied with a scalingfactor: RAMP SCALE LOCAL (parameter 69.7, default = 2.0).The direction of the drive is changed by giving positive or negativereference (REF).

Pressing ON (1), push-button will give ON-order, = contactors on.Pressing Start push-button drive will lift brakes and ramp up per givenspeed reference. If pressing Start on panel but no reference higher thanZERO SPEED LEV (61.1) given within the time LOC ZERO SPEED TD(60.3), than the drive will stop again.

Pressing Stop push-button while running will ramp motor to zero speed,and set brake.

When pressing Off push-button (0) converter will be switched off =contactors off.



5.6.2 Speed monitor ( 61 )The function module is used to supervise the speed of the motor. Thesupervision consists of the following tasks:- To detect motor zero speed rotation- To give tripping signal at motor overspeed

Detection of motors zero speed rotation.While running the motor the output signal ZERO SPEED is ” 0 ”. Whenthe speed is below the level ZERO SPEED LEV (61.1) and the timeZERO SPEED TIME ( 61.2) has elapsed the signal ZERO SPEEDbecomes ” 1”, indicating zero speed on the motor and the mechanicalbrake will be set.

Trips at overspeed.If the motor speed exceeds the level determined by MOT OVERSPEEDLEV (61.3) then the drive is tripped instantly (converter Off + brakes set)via the signal MOT OVER SPEED, indicating fault on panel, to Fieldbusand faultlogger.

5.6.3 Torque monitor (62)

The function module is used to supervise the torque of the motor bychecking that the motor is following the speed reference in terms ofdirection of change during accel-/deceleration and without excessivespeed error during accel-/deceleration and normal running.

For the supervision to be active TORQ MON SEL (62.1) has to be set”True”.

If the absolute value of the speed error (SPEED REF4 - SPEED ACT) ishigher than SP DEV LEV (Parameter 62.2) for a time longer than TORQFLT TD (Parameter 62.3), the drive trips for torque fault; TORQ FLT,indicating fault to panel, Fieldbus and faultlogger.

Parameter SP DER BLK LEV (62.4), rate of actual speed change in %per second, can be set so that it blocks the protection during accelerationand deceleration. As long as the actual rate of change (derivative) of themotor speed during acceleration or deceleration is higher than the settingof parameter SP DER BLK LEV, the torque fault protection is blocked.

Example: Acceleration ramp times set to e.g. 5 seconds. With SP DERBLK LEV set to 8 %/s, the drive will not trip for torque fault if reachingtorque limit during acceleration, as long as the actual acceleration time(0-100%) is below 12.5 seconds (100% / 8%/s = 12.5 s).



5.6.4 Fast stop ( 63 )The module contains logic for fast stopping the drive.Three different types of fast stop can be obtained with this module.They are:- With torque limit only = fast stop 1- With torque limit and mechanical braking = fast stop 2- With mechanical braking only = fast stop 3

Note that fast stop is not to be mixed up with emergency stop.

NOTE: Fast stop functions are not active when in Local control!

The module has three output signals to achieve the different fast stops.FAST ZERO SET is set to ” 1 ” when fast stop 1 is ordered, i. e. fast stopwith torque limit only (brake is applied at zero speed).All three signals FAST ZERO SET, SPEED OFF and FAST STOP areset to ” 1 ” when fast stop 2 is ordered, i. e. stop with both current limitand mechanical breaking.FAST STOP is set to "1" when fast stop 3 is ordered, i.e. fast stop withmechanical braking only.

To run the drive again after reaching zero speed, the START-signal mustbe reset before accepting a new start-order.

There are two input signals from the Fieldbus communication module,FAST STOP 1 and FAST STOP 11 to order fast stop:

-FAST STOP 1 = ” 1 ” gives fast stop 1-FAST STOP 11 = ” 1 ” gives a fast stop per selection parameter 63.1=FAST STOP TYPE 11

To use FAST STOP 11 for:Fast stop 1: set FAST STOP TYPE 11 (63.1) = FAST STOP 1Fast stop 2: set FAST STOP TYPE 11 (63.1) = FAST STOP 2Fast stop 3: set FAST STOP TYPE 11 (63.1) = FAST STOP 3

When using Stand alone mode there is a signal FAST STOP 12,activated by digital input e.g. DI 10 (FAST STOP-N) = "0" (see functionmodule CRANE (64) for more details), which can be programmed to giveanyone of the three types of fast stop. This is done with parameter 63.2=FAST STOP TYPE 12.

For settings of FAST STOP TYPE 12 see FAST STOP TYPE 11 above.



5.6.5 Crane ( 64 )

Table 5-3 Stand Alone default I/O signal interface and functions.

Signal Input(DI set inGroup10)

Function

BRAKE ACKN DI6 Brake acknowledge from aux. Contacton brake contactor (and from brake)

ZERO POS DI2 Zero position contact from joystickSTART DIR A DI7

(fixed)Direction A (pos.) from joystick, to beconnected in series with Stop Lim Aand contact from mechanical overloadprotection equipment

START DIR B DI8(fixed)

Direction B (neg.) from joystick, to beconnected in series with Stop Lim Band contact from slack rope protectionequipment

SLOWDOWN-N Ext DI9 Slow down lim A and B. Direction fromSTART DIR inputs. After a powerdown (CPU init) only slow speed ispossible until this input is ”1”.

FAST STOP-N Ext DI10 Fast stop signal to the converterSPEED REF AI1

(fixed)Speed reference signal from joystick.0-10 V for 0-100 %

TORQ REF AI2(fixed)

Torque reference signal from joystick.0-10 V for 0 to maximum torquereference (maximum set withParameter 64.9 TORQ REF SCALE).

SPEED CORR AI3(fixed)

Speed Correction signal from e.g.electric shaft control unit.0 – (+/-)10V for 0 - (+/-)100% speedcorrection signal.

BRAKE LIFT DO4 Output to brake contactorWATCHDOG-N DO5 Closed contact indicates ”healthy”

drive.Open contact makes hardwiredemergency stop; main contactor(s) offand brakes on.



JOYSTICK MODE: When connecting a joystick directly to the drive I/O,parameter 64.10 CONTROL TYPE should be selected to "Joystick" (=default).

ANALOGUE REF INPUTS: The analogue reference signal (0 - max.reference) is connected to Analogue input 1 for speed reference, and toAnalogue input 2 for torque reference. The sign for the reference, speedas well as torque reference is given by inputs DI7 (Start Dir A) forpositive reference and DI8 (Start Dir B) for negative reference.

REFERENCE CURVE: The joystick for giving reference has parametersfor setting of the deadzone in direction A and B (64.4 and 64.5).REF SHAPE (64.6) is for giving the reference a parabolic shape.Parameter set to ”0” = straight line, "20" = X2 and ”100” = X3 curve.

JOYSTICK CHECKS: The drive is stopped (normal deceleration ramp ifspeed control) and prevented from a new start until the joystick is movedback to the neutral position, i.e. Zero Position (ZERO POS: e.g. DI2 ="1", DIR A: DI7 = "0" & DIR B: DI8 = "0") indicated longer than timeZERO POS OK TD (64.8), if any of following conditions (joystick or wiringproblems) occur for a duration longer than JOYSTICK WARN TD(64.12):

- START DIR A= ”1” and START DIR B=”1” at the same time.- SPEED REF is > 1V or TORQUE REF is > 1V when joystick is in theneutral position (ZERO POS = “1”, DIR A = "0" and DIR B = "0").Indicates a possible loose ground connection.

Panel also indicates this with an alarm text: “WARNING JOYSTICK” .

START: The drive is started when one of the signals START DIR A orSTART DIR B is ”1” and ZERO POS is "0", unless any of the above listedfault conditions occur. The sequence starts with a magnetising phase =ON (unless already magnetised) which is immediately followed by thereference ramp-up.At a normal stop the switching off of the magnetising current is off-delayed by an adjustable time (parameter 65.2 OFF TD).

SLOWDOWN: The speed is slowed down to a preset level (parameterSLOWDOWN SPEEDREF 64.7) if the SLOWDOWN-N input e.g. Ext DI9is zero-set. The converter remembers the direction of movement andallows full speed in the opposite direction as long as the supply voltage(AMC board supply) is not switched off. If the voltage has been switchedoff and the input SLOWDOWN-N = ”0” than only slow speed is allowed inboth directions.

FAST STOP: When the FAST STOP-N input e.g. Ext DI10 changes to"0" (activates on a negative edge) while running, the drive is fast stopped(active in both speed and torque control). Three alternatives Fast Stop 1= Torque limit braking, Fast Stop 2 = Torque limit and mechanicalbraking or Fast stop 3 = Mechanical braking can be selected byparameter FAST STOP TYPE 12 (63.2).After reaching zero speed and the "ZEROPOS" input has been set to ”1”,with a positive edge required for reset of fast stop condition, for a timelonger than parameter ZERO POS OK TD, start of the drive is allowed.That is: the joystick must be returned to the neutral position for aminimum of 0.3 seconds (default value) before starting in other directionis possible.



To avoid running in the same direction (hoisting after overload indicationor lowering after slack rope indication) the appropriate direction inputmust be wired in series with an additional contact from the protectionequipment. These contacts must be NO which are closed when theprotection equipment is energised and opens when a fault occurs.

TORQUE CONTROL is activated when the voltage level of input AI2TORQ REF the first time (after each power on) passes the level 1V, andif the speed reference to AI1 is below 1V.

Speed reference is activated the first time AI1 passes the level 1V (andafter each power on = default).

If both inputs are above limit, than speed control is active.

Updating time for speed and torque references are 40 ms.

SPEED CORRECTION: The additional speed reference input SpeedCorrection (AI3) is a reference without any ramp that is added to theoutput of the normal speed reference ramp generator. Can be used as acorrection input from an "electric shaft" control unit. Updating time is 10ms for the speed correction input.0 V signal is 0 % reference level and the 0 – (+)10 V range correspondsto 0 – (+)100 % speed. 0 – (-) 10 V range corresponds to 0 - (-)100 %speed.The speed correction reference is limited so that the sum of the normal"ramped" speed reference and the speed correction reference cannotexceed Maximum/Minimum Speed setting (parameters 20.1 & 20.2).

WATCHDOG: The signal WATCHDOG-N (digital output 5 as default) isused to indicate a healthy drive. This output is zero-set if the softwaredetects any of the following faults:- Fieldbus communication fault- Brake long falling time– CPU stalls outIf this relay output contact opens, the supply contactor to the convertermust immediately be opened and the mechanical brakes applied byremoving power from the brake contactor = emergency stop of the cranedrive.



S

R

&

& >1

&

Zero pos (DI 2)

Dir A (DI 7)Dir B (DI 8)

Speed ref (AI 1)

Slowdown-N (Ext DI 9)

Fast stop-N (Ext DI10)

Fast stop 12

Drive speed ref.

Start

< Speed ref. reduced>

<Deadzone><Ref. shape>

S

R

Trigg

MAX

<Minimum ref.>

INV

"0"

1V

CRANE stand alone logic using Joystick Control type

&

0t

0t

&Zero speedRunning

<Zero Pos OK TD>

<Abcd> = Parameter

<Joystick Warn TD>

=1

& &

&"Speedref < 5%"

Figure 5-9 Crane Stand Alone logic in Joystick mode



Radio control mode

If the joystick is connected to and monitored by an external unit such asa Radio controller or PLC, then Control type "Radio Control" (parameter64.10) can be used. The differences from "Joystick" control are:- The "Zero Pos" input signal (e.g. DI2) is not used/required.- If receiving both direction orders "Start Dir A" and "Start Dir B" at thesame time, the start order and reference are interlocked while the erroroccurs, but no indication is given to the panel nor any requirement forboth signals to be zero before releasing the interlock- No check of reference level is made before responding to the startorder.

Reference inputs for speed, torque and speed correction reference (AI1-AI3) have the same scaling and functions as in "Joystick" control mode.

&

&

&



Start

Speed ref. (AI 1)

CRANE stand alone logic using Radio Control


MAX

"0"

INV

Fast stop-N (Ext DI 10)Fast stop 12S

R

Trigg

<Minimum ref>

Drive speed ref

=1

Zero speed

"Speedref < 5%"

Figure 5-10 Crane Stand Alone logic in Radio Control mode



Motorised Potentiometer control mode

If using (for example) a pendant controller with push-buttons for startand increase speed, then Control Type (parameter 64.10) should be setto "Motor Pot".

"Start Dir A" and "Start Dir B" contacts connects to DI7 & DI8. "Increase"contacts could be connected in parallel to e.g. DI2.

The Drive will start and accelerate on ramp towards (+ or -) 100 % speedif both direction if the increase input is activated (= closed). If increaseorder is removed before reaching 100 % speed, drive will stopaccelerating and run with the speed level reached. With a new increaseorder the drive will continue to accelerate towards 100 %. If direction order is removed, the drive will decelerate on ramp towards 0% speed. Reclosing the direction contact before reaching 0 % speed willstop deceleration and hold speed at the level reached.

Inputs AI1 and AI2 are inactive in this control mode. Other inputs havenormal functions.

&

&



Start

100%

Ramp output

Increase (DI 2)

CRANE stand alone logic using Motor Pot. control

INV

Fast stop-N (Ext DI 10)Fast stop 12S

R

Trigg


MAX

"0"<Minimum ref>

Drive speed ref

&

=1

Zero speed

Figure 5-11 Crane Stand Alone logic in Motorised Potentiomet



Step joystick reference mode

When using a step type joystick having reference contacts instead of ananalogue potentiometer, the control mode STEP JOYST (parameter64.10) should be used. Up to 4 different speed levels are supported,direction order giving first speed level + 3 more contacts for differentspeed levels. Contacts can be connected to selectable digital inputs(including extended I/O modules), see parameters 10.8 STEP REF2 SEL,10.9 STEP REF3 SEL and 10.10 STEP REF4 SEL. The correspondingspeed reference levels are set with parameters 64.13 SPEED REFLEVEL 1 up to 64.16 SPEED REF LEVEL 4.

All lower step reference contacts must remain closed for next level to beactive.Example: when closing contact corresponding to Step reference level 4,contacts for level 2 and level 3 must still be closed.Note that Zero Pos signal from joystick is required in this mode, similar tocontrol mode JOYSTICK. Joystick monitoring function is active.

Step radio reference mode

When using a radio controller or PLC having step reference outputcontacts, the control mode STEP RADIO (parameter 64.10) can be used.Maximum 4 different speed levels available.Digital inputs and speed reference levels are selected as describedabove with Step Joystick mode.

Zero Pos input signal is not required in this control mode. Joystickmonitoring is not active.



5.6.6 Logic handler ( 65 )Contains logic for on-, off and start-order.

On is the contactor on-command and start command releases speed andtorque controllers. To get an On-order to the converter the signal ONmust become ” 1”. This can only be obtained if no off order is issuedwhich means if:- Electrical disconnect (DI4) = "1".- Converter is not tripped (FAULT = ” 0 ”)- The button ” 0 ” at the panel is not pushed (LOCAL OFF = ” 0 ”)

When an "On signal" is given either in local mode with the panel LOCALON (I) or in remote mode with the signal DRIVE ON (fieldbus mode) orSTART DIR A/ START DIR B (stand-alone mode) to get the signal ON,then a signal Ready For Run is awaited, acknowledging that thecontactors are on. If this acknowledgement is not received within 7seconds the ON-order signal is reset to zero.

Off order is given by the panel LOCAL OFF (0) at zero speed (off push-button on panel) or in external control when signal DRIVE ON is set to”0” (field bus mode ).

If parameter CONTIN ON (65.1) = ” false ” and running becomes ” 0 ” theON signal will be reset to ” 0 ” after expired time OFF TD ( 65.2 ). This isa ” contactor shut-off ” function if the drive is not operated within the lastOFF TD seconds.

"Start order" is issued when START 2 = ” 1 ”. In remote mode the signalSTART OVR (Fieldbus mode) or START DIR A / START DIR B (stand-alone mode) is giving this (the start order). In local mode the start orderis given with signal LOCAL START (start push-button on panel).

No start order can be given unless the converter is "On" = contactors on,acknowledged by the signal Ready For Run.

Signal REF ZERO SET will hold the speed reference to ” 0 ” when FastStop is ordered.

See also timing and logic diagrams on the next 2 pages.



Start if co

ntacto

rs already o

n

Figure 5-12 Start and stop sequence time diagram



Start "Fieldbus"

Elec disc-N

Stop panelZero speed

>1Start "I/O"

On "FieldBus"Start "Panel"

Start 2

0 t

Ready for run

0tRunning

>1

&

On

>1

<OFF TD>

<ON PULS TIME>

Logic handler (65)

&<Contin on>

& >1Fault

TRIGR

S

Figure 5-13 Logic Handler logic



5.6.7 Torque proving (66)Torque proving is a function module included in the drive control toensure, before releasing the brake and starting the crane operation, thatthe drive is able to produce torque, and that brakes are not slipping. Thefunction module is mainly intended for hoist drives, but can also be usedwith other motions using encoder feedback.

Torque proving is performed by giving a negative torque reference(downwards on hoist), with the brake applied. If the reaches the correctlevel, the reference changes sign, and the same test is performed inpositive direction. If torque proving is successful in both directions. Thebrake is lifted, and the next step in the starting sequence is initiated.

The time to execute the torque proving sequence is so short(approximately 100 ms) that the operator does not experience any timedelay in the starting sequence.

The torque proving is activated by setting:- TORQ PROV SEL (66.1) = ” True ”

The torque proving reference, TORQ PROV REF (66.3) sets outputsignal TORQ PROV REF. The actual torque is read from signal2.15=MOTOR TORQUE.

When the torque proving is activated but not yet performed, the outputsignal TORQ PROV OK is ” 0 ”.

The torque proving sequence starts when the input signal RUNNING is ”1 ”, i. e. when the converter is started. When the torque provingsequence is completed the output signal TORQ PROV OK is set to ” 1 ”.

If any fault is detected during the proving sequence, signal TORQ PROVOK does not go to ” 1 ” but output signal TORQ PROV FLT is set to ” 1 ”and the drive trips. A message is displayed on the drive panel and anindication given to the supervisory control.

NOTE: Torque proving is not active (even if selected with parameter66.1) if the drive is in torque control mode.

&

> 1Motor torqueTorq prov OK

Torq prov flt

<TORQ PROV FLT TD>Running

<TORQ PROV REF> Torq prov ref

S

R

Torque proving (66)

<TORQ PROV SEL>

0t

Figure 5-14 Torque Proving logic



5.6.8 Mechanical brake control ( 67)The program supports electrical and mechanical braking to stop themotor. Electrical braking gives a controlled and smooth braking which isthe most common way to bring a motor to stop. Mechanical brakingshould only be used in critical situations and if so there are twopossibilities:- Emergency stop- Fast stop

After the motor has come to zero speed (by electrical braking) themechanical brake should be applied without unnecessary delay.

In the starting sequence it is possible to set a time delay related to thebrake actual lifting time (parameter 69.8 SPEED REF TD in Referencehandler).

The function module contains logic for controlling the mechanical brake.Output signal BRAKE LIFT is the brake lift order. Brake liftacknowledgement is received as input (e.g. DI6) BRAKE ACKN.

Start sequence:A brake lift is initiated by a start order i. e. input signal START 2 = ”1”(from Logic handler function (65)). This will set output signal RUN = ”1”releasing speed & torque controllers. After receiving TORQ PROV OK =” 1 ” and no stop orders are active the BRAKE LIFT is set ”1”. The brakelift order can be delayed with a time set by parameter BRAKE LIFT TD(67.4), this parameter is normally set to 0.

Normal stop sequence:Removing the start order will set the reference to zero and the drive willramp to zero speed (Reference handler). When the input signal ZEROSPEED = ”1” then BRAKE LIFT is set to zero. When receivingacknowledgement BRAKE ACKN = ”0” the RUN order is reset to ”0” afterdelay time BRAKE FALL TIME (67.1). Except at emergency stop(EMERG STOP = ” 1 ” when Power On Ackn = 0 in Fieldbus mode) andfast stop (FAST STOP = ” 1 ”) the brake module maintains the BRAKELIFT and RUN order as long as ZERO SPEED is not detected.

A brake fault, i.e. Brake Ackn (DI6) = 0 (during start or normal running)with a duration longer than setting of BRAKE FLT TD (67.2), activates anoutput signal BRAKE FLT that will trip the drive and indicate.

A long falling time at stop (Brake Ackn =1) with a duration longer thansetting of BRAKE LONG FT TD (67.5), provides indication with an outputsignal BRAKE LONG FTIME to: panel, Fieldbus statusword andactivates the Watchdog output contact (DO5) to make an emergencystop of the drive.

See also logic diagram on next page.



0 t

&

&

Zero Speed

Elec disc-N

Fast stop

Torque prov OK

Start 2

0t<BRAKE LIFT

RUNBrake ackn

<BRAKE FALL

Brake lift

&

&

0t

0t

Brake fault

Brake long fall time

Mechanical Brake Control (67)

Running & &>1>1

Speed off &On

& &>1>1

<BRAKE FLT

<BRAKE LONG FT

Figure 5-15 Mechanical Brake Control logic



5.6.9 Power optimisation ( 68 )"Base speed" is the highest speed for the hoist drive to carry full, ratedload. Normally motor is selected to have a field weakening point aboutequal to Base speed. When increasing the motor speed above motornominal speed=field weakening point (base speed), field weakening isused. Field weakening, however reduces the maximum available torqueof the motor. To ensure that the motor will always be able to producesufficient torque for controlling the load in the field weakening range, amaximum allowed speed is calculated. This function is called poweroptimisation. This means that for a heavy load the maximum allowedspeed is less than that of a light load.

If the power optimisation receives a signal HIGH SPEED OK, telling thatmaximum speed is allowed, the calculated maximum speed reference isused as input to the ramp unit and the motor will accelerate up to thecorresponding speed.

The power optimisation function module can only be used in drives withan active (pulling) load, i. e. in general only on hoist drives

To be active the parameter POWOP SELECT(68.1) must be set ” True ”.Parameters TQLIM UP (68.6) and TQLIM DWN (68.7) are maximumload torque (power limits) in positive/negative running directions.When the speed, during acceleration towards base speed, has reached90% of base speed the module makes a calculation (using speed andtorque measurements during 320 ms before reaching 90% of basespeed) of the maximum allowed speed by the formula:

maximum speed =

TORQ HOLD is torque needed to hold the load, and is calculated by themodule. If the module gets the order HIGH SPEED OK = ”1”, commonlygiven when the master switch is in its outermost position, output SPEEDREF POWOP is set to the calculated maximum speed reference. Thequality of the calculation depends on the measurements done beforereaching 90% of base speed. The speed must have a linear accelerationand without excessive ripple.

The output speed reference SPEED REF POWOP is set to zero if theinput signal HIGH SPEED OK goes to zero. The calculated maximumreference is reset to zero when the actual speed SPEED ACT hasdecreased to a speed corresponding to the parameter POWOP RESETLEV (68.8)

Commissioning instructions for the power optimisation.

This is an instruction how to adjust the parameters INERTIA TOTAL UP(68.4) , INERTIA TOTAL DWN (68.5) , TQLIM UP (68.6) and TQLIMDWN (68.7).

1. Set the parameter POWOP SELECT (68.1) to ”True”

BASE SPEED * TQLIMTORQ HOLD



2. Set the parameter TQLIM UP (68.6) to the rated torque of the motor(100%).

3. Temporarily set the parameter TQLIM DWN (68.7) to 75% of ratedtorque of the motor. The reason to set TQLIM DWN lower than TQLIMFLD WEAK UP is to get about same speed in positive and negativedirections, with a certain load on the hoist.

4. The parameters INERTIA TOTAL UP and INERTIA TOTAL DWN areacceleration constants in positive and negative direction. Use a load thatis 75 - 100% of full load.

5. Set parameter POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL (68.3) to ” true ”. The tuningpart is now activated for one autotune cycle.

6. Start the drive with base speed reference only (from Local or Externalcontrol) in positive (respectively negative) direction, and the motor willaccelerate up to base speed. The motor will need to run at base speedfor about 4 seconds until calculation is ready. If giving start andreference from External control place it's recommended to disconnectHIGH SPEED OK signal during Autotune (in Standalone set par.64.3=100%). Calculation is completed when actual signal no. 1.24TOTAL INERTIA is showing a non-zero value. Stop the drive.

7. Read the actual signal no. 1.24 TOTAL INERTIA on the panel.Repeat this procedure 2-3 times in each direction and calculate theaverage value for parameter INERTIA TOTAL UP and INERTIA TOTALDWN respectively.

8. Set this value to parameter INERTIA TOTAL UP (68.4) or INERTIATOTAL DWN (68.5) depending upon the direction. Reconnect HIGHSPEED OK signal (i.e. in Standalone, set par. 64.3 back to 98%).

9. Check that the final speed in field weakening area for each autotune runin the same direction, is the same speed every time within 1-2 %.

10. Adjusting TQLIM UP and TQLIM DWN:Connect a load equal to the highest load specified to operate to maxfield weakening = 100% speed. Lower parameters TQLIM UP andTQLIM DWN to a low value, e.g. 40%. Testrun from joystick giving fullreference up (resp. down). Check max speed reached. If not equal to100%, than increase TQLIM UP (resp. TQLIM DWN) in steps of 5% untilreaching 100% speed.



5.6.10 Reference handler ( 69)

The function module includes:- Setting of ramp times- Handling of speed references- Torque memory function

Setting of ramp times can be made for both acceleration anddeceleration and can be set differently for forward and backward (orupwards and downwards) with parameters: 69.2 ACC TIME FORW, 69.3ACC TIME REV, 69.4 DEC TIME FORW and 69.5 DEC TIME REV.

The possibility to use a scaling factor for the set ramp times is availablein external (only in Fieldbus mode) and local control mode. In externalcontrol mode the scaling is done with signal RAMP SCALE fromsupervisory control, if parameter 69.10 "RAMP RATE=1" is set False.Parameter RAMP SCALE LOCAL (69.7) is used when running in local.Default setting is 2.0 (except for the Master drive in Master/Followermacro operation, then the setting is fixed at: 1.0), meaning that the actualramp times when running in local control mode are double the settings ofthe ramp time parameters 69.2 - 69.5.

Speed reference when running in external control mode:The drive is using the higher value from DRIVE SPEED REF or SPEEDREF POWOP. The DRIVE SPEED REF is a reference up to base speedat start. Then if the power optimisation has calculated, for the actualload, that it is possible to run above base speed, it will use SPEED REFPOWOP which brings the speed into the field weakening range. DRIVESPEED REF should then normally be rescaled to ”follow” the maximumspeed reached to have a smooth behaviour when decreasing thereference from the joystick (continuous gear).

Speed reference when running in local control mode is SPEED REFLOCAL and the direction is chosen with the direction push-buttons on thepanel.

Speed reference output to speed controller can be delayed if having aslow acting brake (long lifting time) using the time SPEED REF TD(69.8).

The ramp unit is equipped with an S-curve function, for "smoothing" boththe beginning and the end of the ramp. S-curve time constant is set withparameter 69.6 S-RAMP TC.

Parameter START TORQ SEL (69.9) is used for selecting type of torquememory function, to avoid "roll-back" at start on a hoist drive:NOT USED = No extra starting torque

AUTO TQ MEM = Automatic torque memory will store the load torqueneeded when stopping and apply the same torque reference whenstarting again

LOAD MEAS = Starting torque reference is received from a supervisorycontroller(LOAD MEAS REF) e.g. from a load cell. NOTE: signal LOAD MEAS



SEL from Fieldbus command word should be set "true" to enable thisreferenceThe starting torque reference is connected to preset speed controllerintegration part before start.

MAX

0tBrake release ref<Speed ref TD>

Drive speed refSpeed ref powop

Speed ref local

LocalStart 2

1 2

3 4

<ACC TIME FORW><DEC TIME FORW>

<ACC TIME REV><DEC TIME REV>

"0" Speed ref 3

Ramp holdRef zero set

<S-RAMP TC>

Reference handler (69)

"0" "0"

Fast zero set

Figure 5-16 Reference Handler logic



5.6.11 Position measurement ( 70 )The function module is used to give a position measurement from apulse encoder input. Position measurement can be used in both Fieldbusand Stand alone modes.

The measurement can be synchronised to the value POS PRECOUNTPPU sent from the supervisory controller, either by signal PGMSYNCfrom the fieldbus Command word or from digital input hw-sync(parameter 10.6 SYNC SEL).

Acknowledgement of synchronisation is done with the signal SYNC RDYto the supervisory controller. Reset of the acknowledgement is done withsignal RESET SYNC RDY from the supervisory controller.

Hardware synchronisation through e.g. DI.7 can be blocked if HW SYNCINHIBIT from supervisory controller = ” 1 ”. Synchronising edge of DI.7 isselected with parameter SYNC COND (70.2).

Measurement value POS ACT PPU sent to the supervisory controller isthe number of pulses counted divided with the value of parameter POSSCALE (70.1).

The number of pulses counted depends upon the settings of parameters50.2 SPEED MEAS MODE and 50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR. Defaultsetting of SPEED MEAS MODE parameter is that both positive andnegative edges from both A and B signals are counted.Example: If 50.4 is set to 1024 ppr and 50.2 is set to default: “A_-_B_-_”,then a total of 4*1024=4096 pulses are added per revolution of the pulseencoder.



5.6.12 Field bus communication and Fieldbus words ( 71 )

Receive

This part is used to receive signals from a superior controller via a highspeed serial bus in the form of a Field Bus, e.g. Advant link (max 30words/dir), AC31 (max 8 words/dir), Profibus (max 10 words/dir). Thesignal interface is standardised as a block of 7 words where each signalhas its specific position. The module also includes one element forunpacking the Command word signal to 16 Boolean signals. Updatinginterval for datasets 1, 3 & 5 is 40 ms, except DRIVE SPEED REF andSPEED CORRECTION that are updated every 10 ms. For transmissionof signals from drive to superior controller, see Fieldbus communicationTransmit.

Table 5-4 Receive Dataset 1 Word 1

DataSet 1 Word 1: Command WordBit number Signal Range/Unit Description0 = Bit 0, LSB COMTEST REC ”1” ”0” Comtest receive bit.1 DRIVE ON ”1” ”0” Drive On from

overriding control2 HIGH SPEED ”1” ”0” High speed select3 START OVR ”1” ”0” Start from overriding

control4 RAMP HOLD ”1” ”0” Ramp holding

signal5 SEPARATE ”1” ”0” Separate ctrl

select signal (M/F ctrl)6 TORQ CTRL SEL ”1” ”0” Torque control select

signal7 LOAD MEAS SEL "1" "0" Load measurement

select (enable LOADMEAS REF)

8 RESET OVR ”0 → 1”(edge)

Reset from overridingcontrol

9 FAST STOP 1 ”1” ”0” Fast stop 110 FAST STOP 11 ”1” ”0” Fast stop 11 type

select11 PGM SYNC ”0 → 1”

(edge)Programsynchronisation ofposition measurement

12 HW SYNCINHIBIT

”1” ”0” Hardwaresynchronisation inhibit

13 RESET SYNCREADY

”1” ”0” Reset synchronisationready

14 USER MACROCHANGE

”1” ”0”(edge)

User macro 1 & 2change request orshared motionMotor1/Motor2 changerequest

15 = Bit 15, MSB ENABLEFIELDBUS CTRL

”1” ”0” Enable fieldbus start &reference duringStandalone mode



Table 5-5 Receive DataSet 1 Word 2

Example: DS1.2 = DataSet 1, Word 2DataSet.Word(MFB)

Signal Range/Unitcorresp. To32767

Description

DS1.2 DRIVE SPEEDREF

-163.84-+163.84

Drive speedreference(%)

DS1.3 TORQ REF -327.67-+327.67

Torque referencesignal (%Tn)

DS3.1 RAMP RATE 0.00-32.767 Ramp rate scaling ofthe speed ramptimes set in drive(normal=1.0=integer1000 )

DS3.2 SPEEDCORRECTION

-163.84-+163.84

Speed correctionsignal (%)

DS3.3 POSPRECOUNTPPU

-32767-+32767

Preset value positioncounter(sync value)

DS5.2 LOAD MEASREF

-327.67-+327.67

Load measurereference (%Tn)

"SPEED" signals have scaling: 20 000 corresponds to 100 % (par. 69.1)"TORQUE" signals have scaling: 10 000 corresponds to 100 % of motornominal torque.

The communication is supervised continuously using a “toggle bit”received on bit 0 COMTEST REC:

If ”next edge” is not received within a certain time COMTEST FLT TD(71.1), the MAS OSC FLT occurs and the drive trips.

The drive is inverting the bit received from the superior controller (PLC):COMTEST REC and sending it back on transmission DS2.1 Bit 14COMTEST TRA.

NOTE: In the superior controller the received bit should be sent directlyto the drive again without inverting and without delay (recommendedupdating time maximum 100 ms)

Serial communicationPLC Drive



Transmit

This part is used to transmit signals from the drive to a supervisorycontroller via high-speed serial bus in the form of a Field Bus, e.g.Advant link (max 30 words/dir), AC31 (max 8 words/dir), Profibus (max10 words/dir) and ModbusPlus. The signal interface is standardised as ablock of 14 words where each signal has its specific position. Themodule also includes elements for packing 16 Boolean signals to wordsignals. Updating interval for datasets 2 & 4 is 40 ms, except for signalsSPEED ACT and POS ACT PPU that are updated every 10 ms.Updating interval for datasets 6, 8 & 10 is 120 ms.

Table 5-6 Transmit DataSet 2 Word 1

DataSet 2 Word 1: Status WordBit number Signal Range/Unit Description0 = Bit 0, LSB RDY FOR ON ”1” ”0” Ready for on1 ELEC DISC-N ”1” ”0” Electrical

disconnect, DI42 RDY FOR RUN ”1” ”0” Ready for run3 RUNNING ”1” ”0” Running4 ZERO SPEED ”1” ”0” Zero speed5 REM LOC ”1” ”0” Remote /Local

(1= Remote)6 TORQ PROV OK ”1” ”0” Torque proving OK7 USER 1 OR 2 ”1” ”0” User macro 1 or 2

active8 FAULT ”1” ”0” Fault9 WARNING ”1” ”0” Warning10 LIMIT ”1” ”0” Drive in torque limit11 SYNC ”1” ”0” Sync input (e.g. DI7)

status12 SYNC RDY ”1” ”0” Synchronisation

ready13 BRAKE LONG

FTIME”1” ”0” Brake long falling

time indication14 COMTEST TRA ”1” ”0” Communication test

transmit bit15 = Bit 15, MSB SNAG LOAD ”1” ”0” Snag load indication



Table 5-7 Transmit DataSet 2 word 2

Example: DS2.2 = DataSet 2, Word 2DataSet.Word) Signal Range/Unit

corresp. to+/-32767

Description

DS2.2 SPEED ACT -163.84-+163.84

Speed actual (% ofparameter 69.1)

DS2.3 TORQUE ACT -327.67-+327.67

Torque actual (%Tn)

DS4.1 SPEED REF 3 -163.84-+163.84

Speed reference 3 (% ofparameter 69.1)

DS4.2 POS ACT PPU -32767-+32767

Position actual value

DS4.3 MOTOR CURR -3276.7-+3276.7

Motor current (A)

DS6.1 FAULT WORD1 Application faults

DS6.2 FAULT WORD2 Motor control faults

DS6.3 FAULT WORD 3 Motor control faults

DS8.1 ARM VOLT -327.67-+327.67

Armature voltage (% ofparameter 42.6)

DS8.2 FIELD CURR 1 -327.67-+327.67

Field current Motor 1 (%of parameter 41.3)

DS8.3 FIELD CURR 2 -327.67-+327.67

Field current Motor 2 (%of parameter 41.17)

DS10.1 ALARM WORD 1 Motor control warningsDS10.2 ALARM WORD 2 Application & Motor

control warningsDS10.3 FAULT WORD 4 Motor control faults.

DS12.1 AUX STATUSWORD

Auxiliary Status Word

DS12.2 AI1 REF VALUE -327.67-+327.67

Analog Input 1 referencevalue (% of 10V)

Scalings:SPEED ACT & SPEED REF 3 : Integer 20000 = 100 % of par. 69.1TORQUE ACT: Integer 10000 = 100 % of motor nominal torque(Tnom(Nm) = 9550 * Pnom(kW) / nnom(rpm), where Pnom(kW) =Unom(V) * Inom(A))MOTOR CURR: Integer 10 = 1.0 AmpARM VOLT: Integer 10000 = 100 % of parameter 42.6FIELD CURR x: Integer 10000 = 100 % of parameter 41.3 resp. 41.17



Table 5-8 Fault Word 1 Dataset 6 Word 1

FAULT WORD1 = Dataset 6, Word 1:Bit number Signal (panel

fault text)Description

0 = Bit 0, LSB MOT OVERSP Motor overspeed fault1 TORQ FLT Torque fault2 BRAKE FLT Mechanical brake fault34 TORQ PR FLT Torque proving fault5 MAS OSC FLT Fieldbus "oscillator" (toggle) bit fault678 EXTERNAL FLT External fault9 MF COMM ERR Master/Follower bus communication fault10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication fault11121314 MF RUN FLT Master/Follower running fault15 = Bit 15, MSB MASTER FLT Comm module communication fault

Combined fault words

Table 5-9 Fieldbus Dataset 6 Word 2



0 =Bit 0, LSB 01 AUX UVOLT Auxil. Under voltage1 02 OVERCURR Overcurrent2 28 ARM OVOLT Armature over voltage3 04 CONV TEMP Converter overtemp4 05 EARTH FLT Earth fault5 06 MOT1 TEMP Motor 1 overtemp. (measured)6 07 MOT1 LOAD Motor 1 overload (thermal model)7 44 NO I/O I/O board not found8 48 MOT2 TEMP Motor 2 overtemp. (measured)9 27 MOT2 LOAD Motor 2 overload (thermal model)1011 29 MAIN UVLT Mains under voltage12 30 MAIN OVLT Mains over voltage13 31 NO SYNC Not in synchronism14 32 FEX1 OCUR Field Ex. 1 overcurr.15 = Bit 15, MSB 33 FEX1 COMM Field Ex. 1 comm. error






0=Bit 0, LSB 34 CURR RIPP Arm. current ripple1 35 FEX2 OCUR Field Ex. 2 overcurr.2 36 FEX2 COMM Field Ex. 2 comm. error3 38 FHAS SEQU Phase sequence fault4 39 NO FIELD No field ack. / field current too low5 14 SPD MEAS Speed meas fault6 40 NO E FAN No ext. FAN ack.7 41 NO M CONT No main cont. ack.8 17 TYPE CODE Type coding fault910 50 NO C FAN No C FAN ack11 DDCS channel 0 communication fault12 42 FEX1 FLT Field Ex. 1 Not O.K.13 43 FEX2 FLT Field Ex. 2 Not O.K.14 23 MOT STALL Motor stalled15 = Bit 15, MSB 37 OVERSPEED Motor overspeed




0=Bit 0, LSB 65 REVER FLT Reversal fault1234567 SYSTEM FAULT System fault in AMC-DC board89 SW MISMATCH Mismatch of CON- and AMC-DC-software10 CON COMMUNIC SDCS-CON-2 communication fault11 M/F LINK Master/Follower link communication fault1213 PANEL LOSS Control panel link fault14 18 CON FLASH CON FLASH memory fault15 = Bit 15, MSB 20 CON SYS System fault in CON-2 board




ALARM WORD1 = Dataset 10, Word 1:Bit number Signal (panel


0=Bit 0, LSB 01 START INH Start inhibition1 02 EMER STOP Emergency stop23 05 CONV TEMP Conv. Overtemp. alarm45 03 MOT1 TEMP Motor 1 overtemp. alarm6 04 MOT1 LOAD Motor 1 overload alarm78 23 MOT2 TEMP Motor 2 overtemp. alarm9 24 MOT2 LOAD Motor 2 overload alarm10 18 MAIN UVLT Mains undervolt. alarm11 M/F LINK Master / follower link alarm12 26 CONV FAN Conv. fan ack. alarm13 20 CURR DEV Arm. Current deviation alarm1415=Bit 15, MSB 27 EXT FAN Ext. fan ack. alarm


ALARM WORD2=Dataset 10, Word 2Bit number Signal (panel


0=Bit 0, LSB1 29 TYPE CODE Type code changed2 32 UVOLT Aux. Undervoltage alarm345 MASTER FLT Comm module alarm6 JOYSTICK Joystick alarm7 SPEED SCALE Speed scaling (69.01) out of range8 MOT CH BLOCK Shared motion Motor Change Blocked910 21 CON SYS CON communication alarm (2ms timeout)11 CH0 COMMUN DDCS channel 0 communication alarm1213 PANEL LOSS Panel loss alarm1415=Bit 15, MSB




AUX STATUS WORD=Dataset 12, Word 1Bit number Signal (panel


0=Bit 0, LSB DIR A Start Direction A (DI7) ordered1 DIR B Start Direction B (DI8) ordered2 ZERO POS Zero Position (e.g. DI2) ordered3 SLOWDOWN A Slowdown Direction A active4 SLOWDOWN B Slowdown Direction B active5 "not used"6 BRAKE LIFT Brake Lift order (def. DO4)789101112131415=Bit 15, MSB

NOTE: Bits 0 – 4 are I/O information signals in Standalone mode used withSwayControl (+ controlling Command word DS1.1 bit 15 "Enable Fieldbus Ctrl")



5.6.13 Shared motion (80)

Shared motion is used to control two different motors (called Motor 1 andMotor 2) with same converter. Armature circuit is switched between thetwo motors using contactors (not controlled by DCC 600). Converter alsoto be equipped with dual Field exciters (FEX2 + FEX3 or qty 2 FEX3).Note 1: Internal field exciter (FEX2) can only be used with Motor 1.Note 2: EMF control (field weakening) is only available for Motor 1.See also sections 6.4 and 6.8 for more info.

For Motor 2 there is a possibility to set 34 individual parameters inparameter Group 80. These becomes available (group opened) if settingparameter 16.6 Shared Motion Sel = Yes.Note: Parameter 15.5 (User Macro Ch Srce) must be set = "Not Sel" toenable switching to Group 80 parameters for Motor 2.

Switching between Motor 1 and Motor 2 is ordered with bit 14 (UserMacro Change) in Fieldbus Command word DS1.1 . It’s not possible touse digital input signal for selection.Switching is only done if following conditions are both fulfilled:- Running = 0 (i.e. drive must be stopped)- Zero Speed = 1 (i.e. motor must indicate zero speed, see par. 61.1 &61.2)If not fulfilled an Alarm "MOT CH BLOCK" will be indicated (only if RdyFor Run = 1).

Bit set = 0 is ordering normal parameters = parameters for Motor 1.Bit set = 1 is ordering parameters for Motor 2 to be loaded, i.e. parametergroup 80 settings. This signal also controls the switching of Field excitercontrol between Field exciter 1 and Field exciter 2 (e.g. the reduced fieldfor "non-active" field exciter). Also switching between Motor thermaloverload monitors 1 and 2 is done by this signal (see section 6.12.2). Anindication of active selection can be seen in signal 1.11 "Motor Selected".

Switching time is typically approx. 500 ms.

Motor 2 selection can be forced, e.g. during commissioning, by settingparameter 16.6 = FORCE MOT 2.

Note: An alternative way to have dual parameter sets for Motor 1 andMotor 2 is to use the "User Macro" functionality (slower: 1 - 2 sec), seesection 5.7 .



5.6.14 Master/Follower ( 72 )

General

The Master/Follower is a load sharing Application and is designed forapplications in which the system is run by two DCC 600 drives and themotor shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, rail, shaft, etc.

The Master/Follower application is then controlling the load distributionbetween the drives. The Master drive is sending order signals andreferences (speed and torque) through the Master/Follower bus to theFollower drive. The Master is also reading back status information fromthe Follower drive to ensure a safe operation.

The Master/Follower application can be used for both hoist and travelmotions, in both Fieldbus mode and Standalone mode.

The Master station shall always be speed controlled and the Followerstation normally be Torque controlled.

Checklist for a Quick Start-up

The installation procedure of the DCC 600 is explained in the InstallationManual.A checklist for start-up of the Master/Follower application is given below:

1 Switch off the power supplies to the DCC 600 units.

2 Build the M/F link, Master Ch2 to Follower Ch2.

See Figure 5-17 Master/Follower wiring information for Stand Aloneapplication.

NOTE: Optical fibers for Master/Follower bus to be ordered separately!

3 Connect the external control signals to the Master.

4 Switch on the power supplies.

5 Activate M/F control Macro in both DCC 600 drives (Parameter 99.2 Application Macro = M/F CTRL)

6A Stand Alone Mode

In the Master set parameters:- Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to True- Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Master.

In the Follower set parameter:- Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to True- Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Follower.- Torque Selector (Parameter 72.2) to Torque- Brake Int Ackn (Parameter 67.3) to True



6B Fieldbus modeIn the Master set parameter:- Enable Comm module (Parameter 98.2)- Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to False- Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Master.

In the Follower set parameter:- Enable Comm module if required (Parameter 98.2)- Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to False- Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Follower.- Torque Selector (Parameter 72.2) to Torque- Brake Int Ackn (Parameter 67.3) to True

7 Set all application parameters in both drives

8 Switch the DCC 600 units to external control with theLOC

REM - keyon the Control Panel (there should be no L on the first row of the display). Reset both drives.

9 Perform the test run with the motors still de-coupled from the driven machinery. For this test temporary set the Follower in speedcontrol mode (Parameter 72.2 Torque Selector = Speed). Give the control signals both through the Master DCC 600 analogue/digital

inputs (or fieldbus inputs) and from the Masters Control Panel.

Check the correct operation of the Master and Follower drives visually (motor & Control Panel display):• Start and Stop signals to the Master are received by the drives.• The Master follows the speed reference given• The Follower follows the master speed reference.

10 The Control Panel on the Follower is not active and can not control the drive.

11 Change Follower back to Torque mode (set Parameter 72.2 Torque)

12 Switch off the power supplies.

13 Couple the motor shafts to the driven machinery and switch on the power supplies.



Stand Alone mode

The external control signals are connected to the drive concerned. TheMaster controls the Follower via a fiber optic serial communication link.

DCC 600Master Drive

CH2

DCC 600Follower Drive

CH2Rx

RO4RO5 Watch dog-N

RO4 Brake liftRO5 Watch dog-N

Speed ref.Brake ack.Zero Pos.Dir ADir BSlowdown-NFast Stop-N

AI 1DI 6DI 2DI 7DI 8DI 9DI 10

TxTx Rx

Figure 5-17 Master/Follower wiring information for Stand Alone application



Fieldbus Mode

The Master, which is controlled from the Fieldbus, controls the Followervia a fiber optic serial communication link. The external control signalsare connected to the drive concerned. (DI1 – DI8)

DCC 600Master Drive

CH0 CH2

DCC 600Follower Drive

CH2 CH0Tx Rx Tx RxTx Rx

NxxAFieldbusadaptermodul

Rx Tx

RO4 Brake lift

RO5 Watch dog-NRO4RO5 Watch dog-NDI6

DI4DI7

Brake ack.El discSync

DI4DI7

El discSync

Tx Rx

NxxAFieldbusadaptermodul

Rx Tx

Figure 5-18 Master/Follower wiring information for Fieldbus application



Operation:

Master and Follower StationsThe default settings of the Master/Follower Control macro parameters

does not define the station as Master or Follower. The selection is donewith parameter 72.1 Master/Follower mode.

If Follower operation is selected the convertor can not be operated fromthe panel.

Redundancy operationIf one motion is driven by two mechanically coupled motors with separateDCC 600 in Master/Follower mode separate operation of Master orFollower drive can be used for redundancy operation.

The drives can be run separately by using User Macro 1 for normalMaster/Follower operation. (Parameter 99.2 = M/F CTRL) andUser Macro 2 for redundancy operation (Parameter 99.2 = CRANE).

Brake to be controlled by both drives.

Fieldbus Mode Separate operationIn Fieldbus mode the bit SEPARATE in the Control word can also beused for changing from Master/Follower operation to normal, non-Master/Follower operation.

Brake to be controlled by both drives.

Both drives control boards must be powered and the Master/Followeroptic bus are active.

Follower Panel operationThe Follower drive can be operated separately from the Control Panel orDrivesWindow, e.g. during maintenance, by setting parameter 72.2Torque Selector = OFF in Follower drive.



Master/Follower link Specification

Size of the Link: One Master and one Follower station can beconnected.

Transmission medium: Fiber Optic Cable.• Construction: Plastic core, diameter 1 mm, shielded with plastic jacket• Attenuation: 0.31 dB/m• Maximum length between Stations: 10 m• Other:

Parameter Minimum UnitStorage Temperature -55 +85 oCInstallation Temperature -20 +70 oCShort Term Tensile Force 50 NShort Term Bend Radius 25 mmLong Term Bend Radius 35 mmLong Term tensile Load 1 NFlexing 1000 cycles

Various lengths of fiber optic cables are available as optional add-on kitfor the DCC 600.

Connectors on the NAMC board: Blue - receiver (hp 9534, T-1521); grey – transmitter(hp 9534, R-2521)

Serial Communication Type: Synchronous, full duplexTransmission Rate: 4 Mbit/sTransmission Interval: 4 msProtocol: Distributed Drives Communication System, DDCS



5.7 User MacrosUser Macros allow the current parameter settings to be stored inmemory. Two User Macros can be created.

To store your customised parameters:1. Access the Start-up Data group as described in Table 2-6 in Chapter

2 - Overview of DCC 600 Programming.2. Change Parameter 99.2 APPLICATION MACRO to USER1 SAVE or

USER2 SAVE.3. Press ENTER to save.4. The storing takes 0.5 – 2 min. Please wait until parameter 99.2 has

changed to "USER 1 LOAD" or "USER 2 LOAD".

The current settings are now stored in the User Macro. The storing willtake a few minutes, please wait. The Parameter settings can be changedthereafter without loosing the settings saved to the User Macro. Afterpower switch off, when you turn on the power again the original UserMacro settings are valid. (With other Application Macros the parametersetting will be permanently saved when you press ENTER after changingthe parameter value and during power up default values of theparameters are not restored.)

To recall the last saved parameters (User Macro):1. Access the Start-up Data group as described in Table 2-6 in Chapter 2

- Overview of DCC 600 Programming.

2. Change Parameter 99.2 APPLICATION MACRO to USER1 LOAD orUSER2 LOAD.

3. Press ENTER to load.

If you try to load, but the User Macro doesn't exist, a fault indication isdisplayed:

0+?6>?=/<7+-<9

The User Macros can also be switched via digital inputs or Fieldbus byParameter 16.5 as described in chapter 7.

The User Macro used can be changed via a digital input or Fieldbuscommunication (edge triggered) only after the drive is stopped i.e.Running = 0. During the change the drive will not start. Theacknowledgement signal USER 1 OR 2 (digital output or Fieldbus) indi-cates when the change is completed and the drive can be started again.

NOTE: User Macro load restores also the motor settings of Start-upData group. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used.

DCS 600 Firmware Manual 6-1

6 Chapter 6 – DC Converter Functions

6.1 Overview

This chapter includes descriptions of the general DC converter functions like: Startand Stop logic, Field exciters, EMF control, Analog and Digital I/O, Converter andMotor monitoring functions. It also contains reference diagrams showing someavailable signals and parameters.

Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions

DCS 600 Firmware Manual6-2

6.2 Diagrams

Figur 6-1 Speed reference chain

23.0

5

23.0

3

23.0

2

23.0

1

LOC

AL

RE

F1

+

100%

+ +-

D

0

0

+

RE

F1

AC

T1

98.0

2LO

CA

L

MO

TO

R S

PE

ED

ST

AR

T /

ST

OP

CO

NT

RO

L

PU

LSE

EN

CO

DE

RIN

TE

RF

AC

E

KP

S V

AL

MA

X S

PE

ED

KP

S, T

IS

TIS

VA

LM

IN S

PE

ED

mot

or s

peed

KP

S T

IS M

IN S

PE

ED

KP

S T

IS M

AX

SP

EE

D

WIN

DO

W

SP

EE

D R

EF

ER

EN

CE

CH

AIN

SP

EE

D C

ON

TR

OL

SP

EE

DM

EA

SU

RE

ME

NT

DIG

ITA

L

INP

UT

CD

P3

12 o

r

DR

IVE

S

WIN

DO

W

LOC

AL

CT

RL

PA

NE

L

SP

EE

D S

HA

RE

MO

TO

RS

PE

ED

FIL

T

SP

EE

DR

EF

2

SP

EE

DA

CTU

AL

SP

EE

D R

EF

3

SP

EE

DC

OR

RE

CT

ION

SP

EE

DE

RR

OR

NE

G

DR

OO

P R

AT

E

TO

RQ

AC

C C

OM

P R

EF

AC

CE

LE

RA

TIO

NC

OM

PE

NS

AT

ION

AC

C C

OM

P D

ER

TIM

E

AC

C C

OM

PF

ILT

TIM

E

72.0

7

Da

tase

ts 1

, 3,

5 MC

W

RE

F2

MS

W

AC

T2

CO

MM

MO

DU

LE

CO

NS

T S

PE

ED

2(I

NC

HIN

G 2

)

CO

NS

T S

PE

ED

1(I

NC

HIN

G 1

)

23.0

4

23.0

6S

PE

ED

ST

EP

2.04

PID

- C

ON

TR

OLL

ER

TO

RQ

UE

DE

R R

EF

TOR

QU

E P

RO

P R

EF

2.05

2.10

LIM

ITE

R

SP

C T

OR

QM

AX

SP

C T

OR

QM

IN

TO

RQ

RE

F2

TOR

QU

E IN

TEG

RE

F

BA

L R

EF

BA

L_N

CO

NT

SP

C T

OR

QM

AX

KP

SS

PC

TO

RQ

MIN

KP

S

KP

S M

IN

KP

S W

EA

KP

OIN

T

KP

S W

P F

ILT

TIM

E

TIS

TIS

INIT

VA

LUE

KP

S T

IS M

IN S

PE

ED

KP

S T

IS M

AX

SP

EE

D

KP

S V

AL

MIN

SP

EE

D

TIS

VA

L M

IN S

PE

ED

DE

RIV

ATI

ON

TIM

E

DE

RIV

. FIL

T T

IME

KP

S

TIS

TO

RQ

RE

F 2

SP

EE

D E

RR

OR

FIL

T

WIN

DO

W IN

TG O

N

WIN

DO

W W

IDTH

PO

S

WIN

DO

W W

IDTH

NE

G

72.0

5

72.0

6

(-1)F

ILT

ER

1.20

2.02

DV

/DT

RA

MP

RA

TE=1

RA

MP

SC

ALE

LO

CA

L

S-R

AM

P T

C

DE

C T

IME

RE

V

AC

C T

IME

RE

V

AC

C T

IME

FO

RW

2.01

1.01

1.02

69.0

2

69.0

3

69.0

4

69.0

5

69.0

6

69.0

7

69.1

0

FB

CW

:B4

FIL

TE

R

SP

AC

T F

ILT

FT

C

MA

XIM

UM

SP

EE

D

MIN

IMU

M S

PE

ED

LIM

ITE

R

AC

C/D

EC

/SH

AP

E"1

"

"1"

20.0

1

20.0

2

50.0

4

50.0

3

50.0

2

69.0

1

rese

rved

SP

EE

D S

CA

LIN

G R

PM

SP

EE

D M

EA

S M

OD

E

SP

EE

D F

B S

EL

EN

CO

DE

R P

ULS

E N

R

200m

s

SP

AC

T F

ILT

TIM

E

3.01

= F

B S

W =

Fie

ld B

us S

tatu

s W

ord

3.08

= F

B C

W =

Fie

ld B

us C

omm

and

Wor

d

EM

F

TA

CH

OA

I1

1 2 3 4

3.08

DIG

ITA

L

OU

TP

UT

S

2000

0 =

Spe

ed

scal

ing

HO

LD

RA

MP

DE

C T

IME

FO

RW

PI

FIE

LDB

US

AD

AP

TE

R

FIL

TE

R

dcs_600\docu\fig_1.dsf

3.01

0R

AM

PE

D I

NC

H R

EF

0S

PE

ED

CO

RR

RA

MP

AN

IN 1

VA

LU

E

AN

IN 2

VA

LU

EA

N IN

3 V

AL

UE

AN

IN 4

VA

LU

E

AN

IN T

AC

HO

VA

LUE 0

Selector

AI S

PE

ED

SE

LEC

T

US

ED

SP

EE

D R

EF

2.03

CO

N

AM

C

1.12

SP

EE

D R

EF

LOC

AL

Da

tase

ts 2

, 4,

6

2.06

SP

EE

D R

EF

4

Sp

eed

lim

its20

.01

and

20

.02

appl

y he

re a

lso

AI3

Not

e: E

mpt

y "b

oxes

" in

dica

tes

sign

als/

para

met

ers

not v

isib

le in

DC

C 6

00



TO

RQ

UE

CO

NT

RO

L C

HA

IN

LOC

AL

LOA

D S

HA

RE

FIL

TE

R

TO

RQ

RE

F A

FT

C

TO

RQ

RE

F A

72.0

8

72.0

3

TO

RQ

RE

F B

LO

CA

L T

OR

QU

E R

EF

(LO

CA

L R

EF

2)

TO

RQ

RA

MP

UP

TO

RQ

RA

MP

DO

WN

RA

MP

ING

LIM

ITE

R

TR

EF

TO

RQ

MA

X

TR

EF

TO

RQ

MIN

TO

RQ

RE

F 1

2.09

+ +

0 12

3 45

6

2.10

SP

EE

D C

ON

TR

OLL

E R

OU

TP

UT

TO

RQ

RE

F 2

TO

RQ

UE

RE

FE

RE

NC

ES

EL

EC

TO

R

TO

RQ

UE

SE

LE

CT

OR

MIN

MA

X

TO

RQ

RE

F 3

2.11

24.0

3

0

TO

RQ

UE

ST

EP

LO

AD

CO

MP

EN

SA

TIO

NT

OR

QR

EF

4

TO

RQ

RE

F 5

20.0

5

20.0

6

TO

RQ

UE

LIM

ITE

R

MA

XIM

UM

TO

RQ

UE

MIN

IMU

M T

OR

QU

E

TC

TO

RQ

MA

X

TC

TO

RQ

MIN

TO

RQ

US

ED

RE

F

2.14

D

A

AN

OU

T x

NO

M V

AL

AN

OU

T x

NO

M V

OLT

AN

OU

T x

OF

FS

VO

LT

[AN

OU

T x

IND

EX

]A

O1

(AO

2)

AN

OU

T 1

IND

EX

14

.09

AN

OU

T 1

NO

M V

AL

14.0

8A

NO

UT

1 O

FF

S V

OLT

14

.07

AN

OU

T 1

NO

M V

OLT

14

.06

AN

OU

T 2

IND

EX

14

.13

AN

OU

T 2

NO

M V

AL

14.1

2A

NO

UT

2 O

FF

S V

OLT

14

.11

AN

OU

T 2

NO

M V

OLT

14

.10

Ana

log

ue o

utp

uts

+ +

A

D

AN

IN T

AC

H H

I VA

L

AIx

AN

IN T

AC

HO

VA

LUE

Ana

log

ue in

put

s

24.0

1

24.0

2

dcs_600\docu\fig_2.dsf

AN

IN T

AC

H L

O V

AL

AN

IN T

AC

HO

VA

LUE

(si

gnal

) 1.

26A

N IN

TA

CH

HI V

AL

(at +

10V

) 13

.04

AN

IN T

AC

H L

O V

AL

(at -

10V

) 13

.05

AM

C

CO

N

72.0

2

AN

IN 1

VA

LUE

(si

gnal

) 1.

18S

CA

LE A

I1

13.0

1

AN

IN 2

VA

LUE

(si

gnal

) 1.

19S

CA

LE A

I2

13.0

2

AN

IN 3

VA

LUE

(si

gnal

) 1.

20S

CA

LE A

I3

13.0

3

A

D

SC

ALE

AIX

AI 1

,2,3

AN

IN X

VA

LUE

M/F

AI2

or

Fie

ldbu

s

Figur 6-2 Torque reference chain



Figur 6-3 Armature current control

TO

RQ

UE

CO

RR

EC

TIO

N

TO

RQ

US

ED

RE

F

2.1

4

0

FLU

X R

EF

FLD

WE

AK

CU

R R

EF

SLO

PE

di/d

t

41.

10

SC

ALE

HL

LL

20.

12

CU

R L

IM M

OT

BR

IDG

E

20.

13

CU

R L

IM G

EN

BR

IDG

E

CU

R R

EF

3

CU

RR

EN

T C

ON

TR

OLL

ER

CO

NT

RO

L T

YP

E S

EL

AR

M C

UR

PI

P-G

AIN

AR

M C

UR

PI

I-G

AIN

DIS

CO

NT

CU

R L

IMIT

PI

43.

02

43.

03

43.

06

PI-

IP

+ -

LOA

D C

UR

AC

T

409

6==

Mo

tor

nom

ina

l cur

ren

tLO

AD

CU

R A

CT

FIL

T

Arm

atur

eC

urre

ntM

easu

rem

.

EM

FC

alc.

HL

LL

20.

14

MA

X F

IRIN

G A

NG

LE

20.

15

MIN

FIR

ING

AN

GL

E

ALP

HA

_MA

XC

alc.

2.1

6

FIR

ING

AN

GLE

FIR

E U

NIT

SE

LE

CT

ED

BR

IDG

E

MO

TO

R N

OM

VO

LTA

GE

MO

TO

R N

OM

CU

RR

EN

T

99.

05

99.

06

CO

NV

NO

M C

UR

R

Mai

nsV

olta

geM

easu

rem

.

Con

vert

erC

urre

ntM

easu

rem

.

U_S

UP

PLY

42.

06

MA

INS

VO

LT

AC

T

CO

NV

CU

R A

CT

1.0

8

1.0

4

MM

MO

TO

R 1

MO

TO

R 2

Fie

ldC

urre

ntM

easu

rem

.F

IEL

D C

UR

M1

1.0

6

1.0

7F

ield

Cur

rent

Mea

sure

m.

FIE

LD

CU

R M

2F

IRS

TF

IELD

EX

CIT

ER

MO

T 1

NO

M F

LD

CU

R4

1.03

FIE

LD

CU

R R

EF

M1U

SE

D F

EX

TY

PE

15.

051,

2,4,

5,6,

7,8,

9,10

,11,

12,

13

FIE

LD

CU

R R

EF

M2

3,4

FL

D C

UR

@40

% F

LU

X41

.14

41.

15F

LD

CU

R @

70%

FL

UX

41.

16F

LD

CU

R @

90%

FL

UX

FLU

X/F

IEL

DLI

NE

AR

IZA

TIO

N

RL

EM

F V

OLT

AC

T

EM

FC

ON

TR

OLL

ER 4

6.03

EM

F C

ON

KP

46.0

4E

MF

CO

N K

I

FLU

XC

ON

TR

OL

MO

TO

R N

OM

SP

EE

D9

9.08

INT

EM

F R

EF

41.

19

MO

TO

R S

PE

ED

1.0

1

MN

= 1

000

0

Mm

ax =

3.2

* M

N

409

6 =

10

0% o

fI_

MO

Tx_

FIE

LD

_A

AR

MA

TU

RE

CU

RR

EN

T C

ON

TR

OL

SE

CO

ND

FIE

LD E

XC

ITE

R

MO

T 2

NO

M F

LD

CU

R4

1.17

dcs_

600\

doc

u\fig

_3a.

ds4

FLU

X R

EF

FLD

WE

AK

EM

F R

EF

0

FLU

X R

EF

CU

R R

EF

2

FLU

X R

EF

SU

M

AI V

RE

F

MU

X

EM

F R

EF

SE

L

0

0 321

V R

EF

1

FLU

X R

EF

EM

F

V R

EF

SLO

PE

46.0

5E

MF

CO

N B

LO

CK

LE

V

V C

OR

V S

TE

P

46.1

1

V L

IM P

V L

IM N

V r

ef M

odifi

catio

n

V R

EF

2

VO

LT

AC

TU

AL

EM

F A

CT

FIL

T T

C4

6.06

FIE

LD

2 R

EF

via

dri

ve lo

gic

MA

XIM

UM

FL

UX

FLU

X C

OR

1.0

9



6.3 Start and stop sequences Fieldbus mode

The drive is controlled by control and status words. In order to control the drive in aproper way, a "hand shaking" sequence for the logic is necessary. The mainfunctions of the hand shaking sequence is described here.

An overriding control system uses COMMAND WORD to command the drive, andSTATUS WORD to read the actual status of the drive

å-mark with a number describes the order of the instructions.The overriding control system can be an APC, AC80, field bus interface, ...

6.3.1 Start the drive

OVERRIDING (PLC) DRIVECOMMAND WORD STATUS WORD3.08 3.01

When the drive is ready to close the maincontactor, the drive sets the bit RDY FORON

å Ô RDY FOR ON = 1

ON-order is given

ON = 1Õ

Drive closes the contactors for the converterand motor fans, the field exciter contactorand the main contactor. After checkingmains voltage, phase sequence and allacknowledges, program sets the RDY FORRUN bit.

ê Ô RDY FOR RUN = 1



START-order is given

START = 1Õ

Drive releases references and controllers.

Ô RUNNING = 1

The overriding systemoperates the drive by settingdesired speed reference,torque reference etc.

6.3.2 Stop the drive

The drive can be stopped in two ways, either taking off the "ON"-command whichopens contactors as fast as possible or by following next sequence:

OVERRIDNING (PLC) DRIVECOMMAND WORD STATUS WORD

STOP-order is given

START = 0Õ åDrive stops by coasting. It sets the bit

ÔRUNNING = 0

The overridning systemcan keep "ON" command"1" if it is needed to start thedrive rapidly

OFF-order is given

ON = 0Õ êDrive stops by coast stop. The main, field,fan and brake contactors are opened. Thedrive sets the bit

Ô RDY FOR RUN = 0



6.4 Field Excitation

DCS600 has a possibility to use several kinds of field exciters or combinations ofthem, depending on the application. This chapter explains the basic differences ofvarious field exciters. Functions using field exciters are also explained in this chapter.

DCS600 MultiDrive Converter

MOTOR 1

M

EXTERNALFIELDEXCITER

RS-485

Field monitoring

X14

X14

X14

RS-485

Control

CONTROL CARD

SCDS-CON-2

I/O-cards

X16

FIELD

-flux control, field reference-field logic-EMF-control

Field refere nce

SDCS -FEX-1SDCS -FEX-2

- DCF503/504- DCS600


Acknowledgefield exciter

Control

Figur 6-4 Basic parts of the field excitation.



6.4.1 Field exciter type selection

The used type of the field exciter is selected by parameter

USED FEX TYPE (15.05)0 No field exciter selected1 Internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-12 Internal SDCS-FEX-2, or external DCF503/5043 external DCF503/504 as a second field exciter4 internal SDCS-FEX-2, or external DCF503/504, as a first field exciter

and external DCF503/504 as a second field exciter.5...8 other field exciter, acknowledge through Dix (Not used).9...13 other field exciter, acknowledge through Aix (Not used).

The program by-passes the field acknowledge signal when "No field exciter" isselected. This selection is intended for testing purposes.

Two field exciters are used with the function "Shared motion", see point 6.4.5 below.

6.4.2 Internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1

The current setpoint when using SDCS-FEX-1 is selected by adjusting appropriatevoltage output from the field autotransformer. The program does not measure thecurrent value but an acknowledge signal flags whether the field exciter has current ornot. No more parameter settings are needed. If the current stucks at zero more than6 second after "ON" -command is given, the drive will trip with fault indication:39 NO FIELD.

6.4.3 Internal field exciter SDCS-FEX-2

Internal field exciter SDCS-FEX-2 is a half controlled bridge that can control the fieldcurrent with one (positive) direction. Due to the nature of the half controlled bridge, avery small amount of current (5...10%) always flows through the bridge if the fieldcontactor is closed. SDCS-FEX-2 is controlled via the serial communication link.SDCS-FEX-2 measures field current and sends the value to the drive via serialcommunication. The measured field current is used to generate an acknowledgesignal. If the field current exceeds the trip level, the drive will trip with fault indication:32 FEX1 OCUR. If the current level drops below the minimum field current, thecontrollers are blocked after delay time 2 seconds and the drive will with faultindication: 39 NO FIELD. If the current stucks at zero more than 6 second after "ON" -command is given, the drive will also trip with fault indication: 39 NO FIELD.

6.4.4 External field exciters DCF503/504

External field exciter DCF504 can control the field current both in positive andnegative direction. The desired direction is defined by the sign of the field currentreference. A positive sign means "forward" bridge and negative sign "reverse" bridge.The field current supervision logic is handled in a similar way as with SDCS-FEX-2.



6.4.5 Two field exciters at the same time, field current references

When the same converter controls two motors as a "shared motion", the converter isswitched between two motors by means of an extra contactor. Both motors have stilltheir own field exciter. In the documents the main motor field exciter is called "firstfield exciter", while the second motor field exciter is called "second field exciter".

Motor heating function is possible for the unused motor by means of a reduced fieldcurrent reference.

6.4.6 Settings

For proper operation of the field excitation, setting of the nominal field current ismandatory. The other parameters are normally not needed to change.

The nominal current of field exciters

MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR (41.03)MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR (41.17)

The minimum field current level

FIELD 1 MIN TRIP (44.17)FIELD 2 MIN TRIP (44.22) default value: 50% of rated current

The delay of the minimum field trip is 2 seconds which is the maximum time, the fieldcurrent is allowed to be below the minimum field current level.

The overcurrent level

FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV (20.16)FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV (20.17) default value: 115% of rated current

6.4.7 Field Reduction on Stand-Still

The motor field can be reduced at a stand-still situation in order to avoid overheatingif the motor isn’t running. The function is activated by means of two parameters:

FLD 1 HEAT SEL (15.11) Selection for first motorFLD 2 HEAT SEL (15.12) Selection for second motor in case of

shared motion.

The used current references are selected by means of two parameters:

FIELD 1 REF RED (44.13) Reference for first motorFIELD 2 REF RED (44.21) Reference for second motor in case of

shared motion.

The function is activated when

- "ON"-command is "1", so the main contactor is closed- the drive is in RDYREF -state.- 10 seconds elapsed.



6.4.8 Field Heating at "OFF"-State

The motor field can have a small value in order to avoid condensation when motor isin "OFF"-state. The function can be activated by means of parameter:

FIELD HEAT SEL (15.10)

The used current references are the same as with the field reduction function:

FIELD 1 REF RED (44.13) reference for first motorFIELD 2 REF RED (44.21) reference for second motor in case of

shared motion.

The function is activated when command "ON" is "0" (main contactor open). Thefunction closes the field contactor.



6.4.9 Field current / motor FLUX linearisation

If there is need to control accurate torque, the field current is to be linearised. This iscaused by the non-linear relation of motor flux and field current due to saturationeffects of the field winding.

Motorflux


Id

Figure 6--5 Flux of DC-motor vs field current.

The magnetisation of the motor starts to saturate after certain field current and thusthe motor flux does not increase linearly. For this reason the field current cannot bedirectly used to define FLUX inside the motor. On the other hand the motor armaturevoltage without load (=EMF) is directly proportional to the motor flux and motor speedbelow field weakening area. E.g. if motor nominal DC voltage is 440V and the motoris run using half speed and full FLUX, then the DC voltage is about 220V. Then if theflux is reduced by 50% and while keeping the same speed, the DC voltage is about110V. (Example !).

Since the motor EMF-voltage is directly proportional to motor FLUX it is possible todefine relationship between field current and motor FLUX by means of measuringmotor armature voltage without load (EMF).

The main idea of linearisation is to find such field current which produces desiredEMF-voltage at a certain speed. The linearisation is done by means of a functionblock provided with 3 defined values:

• 90% field current• 70% field current• 40% field current

The intermediate values are interpolated. During commissioning the 3aforementioned must be programmed, if the EMF-controller is desired to use.



An example of the linearisation procedure

There are various ways to define the needed values for the field current linearisation.The following procedure is given as example to explain the linearisation.

1. Select Field Control Mode (FIELD CONTRL MODE, 15.06)= EMF control without field reversal (1: EMF)

Set EMF-controllers output limits to zero(46.01 POS LIM EMF CON)(46.02 NEG LIM EMF CON)

Set 41.19 INT EMF REF = 100 %

2. Run the motor to half speed.Read EMF VOLT ACT (signal 1.9) e.g. measured value is 220V

3. Reduce 41.19 INT EMF REF until EMF VOLT ACT (1.9) reaches 90 % ofthe 1st measurement.Read the value REL FIELD CUR M1 (2.26) and write it to parameterFLD CUR @90% FLUX (41.16)

4. Reduce 41.19 INT EMF REF until EMF VOLT ACT reaches 70 % of the1st measurement.Read the value REL FIELD CUR M1 (2.26) and write it to parameterFLD CUR @70% FLUX (41.15)

5. Reduce 41.19 INT EMF REF until EMF VOLT ACT reaches 40 % of the1st measurement.Read the value REL FIELD CUR M1 (2.26) and write it to parameterFLD CUR @40% FLUX (41.14)



6.5 EMF - Controller

The EMF - controller main control function:

• When running the motor above nominal speed, the EMF-controller reducesmotor field in order to keep the EMF-voltage constant at maximum level.This prevents armature over voltage and ensures the maximum possibleflux.

6.5.1 Selection of EMF - controller

The EMF-control function can be activated by means of parameterFIELD CONTRL MODE (15.06).

0 FIX no EMF-control 4Q1 EMF EMF-control, no field reversal 4Q2 FIX/REV Field reversal, no EMF-control 1Q3 EMF/REV Field rev. + EMF-control 1Q4 FIX/OPTI/REV Field rev. + OPTITORQUE, no EMF-control 1Q5 EMF/OPTI/REV Fieldrev. + EMF-control + OPTITORQUE,

no EMF-control 1Q6 FIX/OPTI OPTITORQUE, no field rev. 4Q7 EMF/OPTI EMF-control + OPTITORQUE, no field rev. 4Q

Field reversal is normally used for 1-quadrant drive type. The type of the field excitermust also be such that field current can be controlled, like with SDCS-FEX-2 orDCF503/504.

6.5.2 Field weakening area

Above the motor’s nominal speed the motor flux is to be reduced in order to avoidarmature over voltage. This area is called "field weakening area", and the speed atwhich the field reduction starts, is called "field weakening point". Above fieldweakening point the motor FLUX is reduced. Three parameters are needed to definethe function:

SPEED SCALING RPM (69.1) Max. speed of the drive in rpm. This rpmvalue equals to integer speed value 20000.NOTE: Must be set in the range of87%…500% of the motor nominal speed(99.08). Otherwise an alarm (SPEEDSCALE) is generated.

MOTOR NOM SPEED (99.08) The motor field weakening point. Integerscaling: 20000 = maximum speed (asdefined with parameter 69.1)

INT EMF REF (41.19) Nominal internal EMF reference, in percentof nominal AC supply voltage (as definedwith parameter 42.6).



6.6 ANALOG AND DIGITAL I/O

6.6.1 I/O-Board Configuration

The parameter IO BOARD CONFIG [98.08] selects the IO boards connected to theSDCS-CON2 board. The SDCS-IOB2 and SDCS-IOB3 boards do not extend theamount of available I/O resources, but change their electrical behaviour.

0: NO I/O BOARD1: IOB22: IOB33: IOB2+3: SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3

The SDCS-IOE board extends the amount of available DI resources.

4: IOE: SDCS-IOE5: IOE+IOB2: SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB26: IOE+IOB3: SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB37: IOE+IOB2+3: SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3

This parameter configures the I/O board supervision. A selected board must bepresent, a present board must be selected. Otherwise a fault ”44 NO I/O” isgenerated.

The configuration of the available DI resources is done by means of parametersinside the Digital inputs, group 10.

6.6.2 Digital Inputs

The digital inputs consist of 8 connections. With the I/O extension board SDCS-IOE-1, 7 additional inputs are available. All the connections of the 8 standard inputs areon the SDCS-IOB-2 board (or SDCS-CON-2, if SDCS-IOB-2 is not used). The digitalinputs are isolated and filtered. The time constant for filters can be selected. Inputvoltage levels are 24 V dc...48 V DC, 115 V AC or 230 V AC depending on thehardware of the board.

Digital inputs DI1-DI8 are used for several purposes, like for example:

• acknowledge of main contactor, DI3• acknowledge of converter fan, DI1• acknowledge of external fan, DI2 (enabled with par. 15.7)• electrical disconnect, DI4• motor temperature protection(Klixon), par. 28.18• external fault, par. 30.3• mechanical brake acknowledge, par. 10.1• joystick and limit switches, par. Group 10

See appendix B for more details.



6.6.3 Analogue Inputs

Figur 6-6 Structure of DCS600 MultiDrive’s analogue inputs.

4 analogue input channels are available. All connections are on the SDCS-IOB-3board (or SDCS-CON-2, if SDCS-IOB-2 is not used). All four channels of IOB-3 canbe scaled according to the needs of the applications. Resolution of channels 1...2 is12 bits +sign and channels 3...4 11 bits +sign.

SDCS-IOB-3:

• input range: -10V…+10 V, 0/4 mA…20 mA (AI1, AI2, AI3)• -1 V...+1 V (AI2 and AI3 only)• The input range is selected by jumpers of the board, see figure below• all analogue inputs are galvanically isolated• current generator for PT100 (5 mA) and PTC (1,5 mA) elements• Earth fault monitor input

Analogue inputs can be used for following internal applications:

• speed measurement if SPEED FB SEL (50.03) = ANALOG TAC• temperature measurement(s) of the motor(s)

(see part 6.12 Motor protection).• Earth fault monitoring (see part 6.10 Earth fault monitoring).

AN IN TACHO VALUE

AN IN 1 VALUE

AN IN 2 VALUE

AN IN 3 VALUE

AN IN 4 VALUE

Analogue tacho response(SPEED FB SEL par. 50.3)

SPEED REF

1.26

1.18

1.19

2.20

13.04

13.01

13.03

13.02

13.05

TORQUE REF(or Motor1 Temp (par.28.09)possible if Torque ref notused, i.e. par. 13.02=0)

SPEED CORRECTION REF(or Motor2 Temp (par. 28.12)possible if Speed corr not usedi.e. par. 13.03=0)

EARTH FAULT MONITORINGEARTH CUR FLT SEL (28.19)

dcs600\docu\fig_24.dsf

AN IN TACH HI VALAN IN TACH LO VAL

SCALE AI1

SCALE AI2

SCALE AI3



T1

X3

X4

X5

X1

X2

S2

S3

S1

S10

SDCS-IOB-3

AITACAI1AI2

S1:1-2

S1:3-4

S1:5-6

Gain=1Input range:-10V..+10V

Gain=10Input range:-1V..+1V

Earth faultmeasuringselected

S2:1-2S2:3-4

S2:5-6

S2:7-8

AI3 S1:7-8

S3:1-2

S3:3-4S3:5-6

S3:7-8

SwitchCh Input range:0/4...20 mA

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

AI4 S1:9-10

AI4S1:11-12S1:13-14

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

1 7

8

8

1 7 1

13 14

2

12

2223

S4

12 2

111

2

2

S1:9-10

R110

S51

24

3

A1 B1

26pin

A1 B1

3

24V17

1

1

1

12

10

12

26pin

S1:11-12S1:13-14

dcs600\docu\fig_25.ds4

Figur 6-7 Jumper coding of the analogue inputs.

Current source settings for PT100 and PTC elements are following:

S5: 1-2 closed S5:3-4 open 1,5 mA (PTC)S5: 1-2 open S5:3-4 closed 5 mA (PT100)



6.6.4 Analogue Outputs

Three (3) analogue output channels are available. All connections are at the SDCS-IOB-3-board (or SDCS-CON-2, if SDCS-IOB-2 is not used). The first two outputs areprogrammable. The range of outputs is +10V...-10V, while the resolution is 11 bits +sign.

The third output is fixed and used for indication of armature actual current directlyfrom HW measurement. The basic scaling of the output is: 3V equals to theconverter’s nominal current.The gain can be adjusted by means of potentiometer R110 in the SDCS-IOB-3board.

Figur 6-8 Structure of the analogue outputs.

SDCB- IOB- 1

X1:16,17

X1:18,17

X1:19,20

SDCS- IOB- 3

X4:1,2

X4:3,4

X4:5,6

AN 0UT 1 INDEX

SCALEIN

MUL

DIV

OADD2 HL

LLHL=+10VLL=-10V

10000-10000

SCALEO

ADD2 HL

LLHL=+10VLL=-10V

10000-10000

HL

LLHL=+10VLL=0V

40950

AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT

AN OUT 1 NOM VAL

ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT

ARM CUR ACT FILT

1.18


14.04

14.01

14.03

14.02

IN

MUL

DIV

AN 0UT 1 INDEX

AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT

AN OUT 1 NOM VAL

ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT

14.04

14.01

14.03

14.02



The signal selections for analogue outputs are made by the parameters

AN OUT 1 INDEX (14.9) 0 = overriding control system commandsthe channel

AN OUT 2 INDEX (14.13) <>0 = signal group and index

The output is scaled by the parameters

AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT (14.6) Output voltage in mV when the connected signalequals to the value given by parameter(14.08)Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV

AN OUT 1 NOM VAL (14.8) Nominal value of the connected signal

AN OUT 2 NOM VOLT (14.05) Output voltage in mV when the connected signalequals to the value given by parameter (14.12)Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV

AN OUT 2 NOM VAL (14.12) Nominal value of the connected signal

An offset voltage can be set by the parameters

ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT (14.07) Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV.ANOUT 2 OFFS VOLT (14.11 Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV.

6.6.5 I/O-Extention Board

The I/O extension board SDCS-IOE-1 provides additional 7 digital inputs, seeAppendix B for more details. NOTE: Additional analog inputs are not used in DCC600 (therefor jumpers S1-S4 and terminal X2 are not used).


SDCS-IOE-1

X17

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X2 X1S1 S2 S4S3

H1DI9

H2DI10

H3DI11

H4DI12

H5DI13

H6DI14

H7DI15

* * * *8

21

71 2

431 2

431 2

43

Figur 6-9 SDCS-IOE-1 and its jumper settings.



6.7 DC-Breaker (Option)

The DC-breaker is used to protect the motor from overcurrent or, in case of mainsunder voltage, the generator bridge from blowing up.

TP

I

TE

OMONO1OR2

>1-MAINS UNDERVOLTAGE

OVERCURRENT

6.05 / B11s

TRIP_DC_BREAKER

dcs_600\docu\fig_28.ds43.03 / B11

3.03 / B1

Figur 6-10 Control of the DC-breaker.

The program produces the signal TRIP_DC_BREAKER (bit 1 of CON2 BITS (6.05))immediately after overcurrent or mains under voltage has been detected. If a DO-channel is assigned to this signal, the DO-channel is updated as fast as possible(immediately after detecting the tripping situation).

6.8 Shared motion

If one converter controls two motors, the connections for motors are made withexternal contactors. Both motors have still their own field exciters. The field excitercalled "first field exciter" is controlled normally. Another field exciter for the motor 2 iscontrolled only by using constant field current reference. This function is used e.g. inthe crane application where one motor is used for lift the load with adjustable fieldand the other motor is used e.g. moving the whole crane. Only one motor is drivensimultaneously.

DCS600 MultiDrive Converter

MOTOR 1

M

RS-485

X14

X14

RS-485

Control

SCDS-CON-2

X16

FIELD

RS-485

MOTOR 2

MFIELD

SECOND FIELD EXCITER

X2:4X2:5

C o n tro l

Address of RS485for second unit

F IR S T F IE L D E X C ITE R

F IR S T F IE L D E X C IT E R

Control

- DCF503/504 - DCF503/504

C ON TR OL BO AR D

SDCS-FEX-2


I/O-Boards

Figur 6-11 Principle of shared motion.



The type of the first field exciter can be either SDCS-FEX-2 or DCF503/504.Thesecond unit must be DCF503/504.

For the second unit the address of the RS485 serial link is set for:

DCF503/504: by the hardware jumper in theDCF503/504 terminal blocks

6.9 Power loss monitoring and auto-reclosing

The Auto-Reclosing function allows to continue drive operation immediately after ashort mains failure without any additional functions of the overriding control system.

In order to keep the overriding control system and the drive control electronicsrunning through the short network dip, a UPS is always needed for 220 V ACauxiliary voltage. Without the UPS all DI-signals like emergency stop, faulty startinhibition (OFFx), acknowledge signals etc. would have false states although thesystem itself would stay alive.

The Auto-Reclosing function defines whether the drive is tripped immediately bymains under-voltage or if the drive will continue running after the mains voltagereturns.

6.9.1 Short Power Loss

The supervision of main supply under voltage has two limits,

U NET MIN 1 (40.01) alarm levelU NET MIN 2 (40.02) tripping level.

If the mains voltage falls below the U NET MIN 1 (40.01) limit but stays above theU NET MIN 2 (40.02) limit, the following actions take place:

• Firing angle is set to max.• Half pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible• The alarm “18 MAIN UVLT” is generated.• During net failure the speed ramp output is updated from the measured

MOTOR SPEED (1.01).• the output of the EMF-controller is frozen.

If the mains voltage returns before the time defined by parameterPOWER DOWN TIME (40.03) and the overriding control system keeps the commands"ON" and "RUN" = 1, the drive will start after 2 seconds. Otherwise the drive tripsafter this power down time has elapsed (fault “29 MAIN UVLT”)

When the mains voltage drops below the limit U NET MIN 2 (40.02) , the action isselected by means of the parameter



PWRLOSS TRIP (15.04)

0 IMMEDIAT the drive will trip immediately to the fault:"29 MAIN UVLT".

1 DELAYED The drive starts automatically if possible(see U NET MIN 1 above).Below the limit U NET MIN 2the field acknowledge signals are ignored.

If UPS is not available, PWRLOSS TRIP (15.04) should be set to 0 (IMMEDIAT, thedrive will trip to the mains under voltage fault) to avoid secondary phenomena due tomissing power for DIs or AIs.

6.10 Earth fault monitoring

The earth fault indication is based on a sum current transformer T1 in the AC-side ofthe converter. The secondary side can be connected to the analogue input channelAI4 of the SDCS-IOB-3-board (By use of strapping S1, see Figure 6-8). The sumcurrent of three phases has to be zero, otherwise an earth fault is detected. The earthfault protection is activated by means of the parameter:

EARTH CUR FLT SEL (28.19)0 NOT USED (default value)1 ACTIVATED

The earth fault current tripping level is set in Amps to the parameter:

EARTH CUR FLT LIM (28.20)4 = default = 4A

The delay before tripping is set in 0.001 s to the parameter:

EARTH CUR FLT DEL (28.21),10 = default = 10 ms

The earth vurrent signal connected to analogue input AI4 must be scaled as 1V==4A.

6.11 Monitoring functions

6.11.1 Speed Measurement Supervision

The supervision of the speed measurement is based on the relation between themeasured speed and measured/calculated EMF.



QR

SSR

MULX

MULX

MULX

AND2&

AND2&

I1I2 I1<I2

I1=I2I1>I2

COMP-I

I1

I2I1<I2I1=I2I1>I2

COMP-I

I1I2

I1<I2I1=I2I1>I2

COMP-I

I1I2

I1<I2I1=I2I1>I2

COMP-I

OR2

>1-

ACTSW-C1

28.24SPEED EMF MON LEV

28.23SPEED MEAS MON LEV

3.04 / B5

SPEED_MEAS_FAULT

6.05 / B15

1.09

EMF VOLT ACT

FIELD1_REV_ACK

-1

-1

+1-1

RESET

MOTOR SPEED

1.01


Figur 6-12 Speed measurement supervision.

Above a certain EMF-voltage the measured speed must also be above zero and thesign of the speed measurement must be correct. Otherwise the fault"14 SPD_MEAS " will be generated.The level of EMF-voltage the supervision is activated at is set by the parameter

SPEED EMF MON LEV (28.24) default: 50V

The speed monitoring trips, if the measured speed drops below the valueprogrammed to the parameter

SPEED MEAS MON LEV (28.23).default: 15rpm

6.12 Motor protection

6.12.1 Measured Motor Temperature

Two motor temperatures can be measured at the same time. Both measurementshave an alarm limit and a tripping limit. The limits are programmable.

The temperature measurements use AI-channels AI2 and AI3. NOTE: “AI2-temp”cannot be used in Standalone mode (parameter 64.1=True) if Torque ref. is used (ifnot used set par. 13.2 = 0). "AI3-temp" only possible to use if "Speed Corr" not used,i.e. if par. 13.3 = 0 .

the SDCS-IOB-3-board features a selectable current generator for• PT100 (5 mA) or• PTC (1.5 mA)-elements.

The unit of the measurement depends on the selected measurement mode. ForPT100 the unit is Celsius.For PTC the unit is Ω.

Measurement selection

Max. 3 PT100 elements can be connected in serial. In case of only one PT100element the AI-channel measurement range must be configured by hardwarejumpers to the voltage range 0...1V.



The measurements are configured by the parameters:

MOT 1 TEMP SEL (28.09) For analogue input 2MOT 2 TEMP SEL (28.12) For analogue input 3

0 NOT USED (default value)1 1 PT100 [°C], 5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+1 V2 2 PT100 [°C], 5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+10 V3 3 PT100 [°C], 5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+10 V4 PTC [Ω], 1.5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+10 V

Alarm and tripping limits

In case of over temperature the main and the field contactors will be opened but fansare kept running until the temperature falls short of the alarm limit.

For the PT100-measurement alarm and tripping limits are set directly as Celsius-degrees.In the case of thermistor measurement (PTC) limits are set as resistance values.(0...4000 ohms).

Alarm levels are set by the parameters:

ALARM LIM M1 TEMP (28.10), analogue input 2ALARM LIM M2 TEMP (28.13), analogue input 3

Tripping limits are set by the parameters:

FAULT LIM M1 TEMP (28.11), analogue input 2FAULT LIM M2 TEMP (28.14), analogue input 3

When a certain limit is set to zero then the according function is by-passed.

6.12.2 Motor Thermal Model

General

In DCS600 MultiDrive there are two thermal models that can be used at the sametime. Two models at the same time are needed in case of one converter is shared totwo motors, e.g. shared motion drive sections. By means of one signal the measuredarmature current is directed to the desired model. In normal case only one thermalmodel is needed.

The thermal model of the motor is recommended to use if a direct motor temperaturemeasurement isn’t available and the current limits of the drive are set higher than themotor nominal current.

The thermal model does not directly calculate the temperature of the motor. Thethermal model calculates the Temperature rise of the motor based on the fact that



when starting to run the cold motor with nominal current the motor will reach the endtemperature after the specified time. This time is about four times the motor thermaltime constant.

The temperature rise of the motor behaves like the time constant which isproportional to the motor current power of two.

Iact2

Φ= * ( 1 - e -t/τ ) * 100 (1)Iref2

where

Φ temperature riseIact motor currentIref reference current, Normally rated current of motor.τ temperature time constant.100 scaling factor

When the motor is cooling down, the temperature model follows next formula

Iact2

Φ= * e -t/τ ) * 100 (2)Iref2

As from the formulas (1) and (2) can be seen, the temperature model uses the sametime constant when motor is heating or cooling down.

Thermal model selection

The activation of thermal models is made by the parameter

THERM MODEL SEL (15.03)0 NONE no thermal model (default)1 MOTOR 1 thermal model of motor 12 MOTOR 2 thermal model of motor 23 MOTOR 1 + 2 thermal model of both motors

If both thermal models are activated, the overriding control system can select bymeans of the signal

USER MACRO CHANGE (e.g. with Command word, DS1.1:14)0 MOTOR 11 MOTOR 2

which thermal model follows the armature current measurement. The input value forthe not selected one is always zero. So one thermal model follows armature currentwhile the other is "cooling down".If the thermal model is not activated, its output is forced to zero.



Alarm and tripping limits

Alarm and tripping limit calculations use as a base current (Iref) a value given by theparameters

TEMP MODEL 1 CUR (28.02)TEMP MODEL 2 CUR (28.06)

The normal value is 100% (integer:4096) (≅ motor rated current). This value shouldnot normally be changed. If, for some reason, it is not possible to run the motorcontinuously with it’s rated current, e.g. due to poor cooling environment, that valuecan be decreased. E.g. the desired continuous load is 85% of the used motor ratedcurrent. The value for parameters are then 85% (integer: 0.85 * 4096 = 3481).

Alarm and tripping limits are selected by means of four parameters

ALARM LIM LOAD I1 (28.03) Integer scaling:TRIP LIM LOAD I1 (28.04) 1 == 1 % of nominal load

ALARM LIM LOAD I2 (28.07) -"-TRIP LIM LOAD I2 (28.08) -"-

The default values are selected in order to achieve quite high overload ability. E.g.the current must continuously be √120 * 100 = 109.5% before alarming, while fortripping the current must be √130 * 100 = 114%.

Recommended value for alarming is 102% and for tripping 106% (of nominal motorcurrent) which means the following settings on parameters:

recommended value for alarm 104 % (100 * 1.022)recommended value for trip 112 % (100 * 1.062)

Thermal time constant

The time constants for both thermal models are set by two parametersTEMP MODEL 1 TC (28.01) Integer scaling:TEMP MODEL 2 TC (28.05) 1 == 1 sec

One has to take into account that the thermal time constant cannot be used directlywhen calculating the tripping time. In many cases the motor manufacturer provides acurve that defines how long the motor can be overloaded by a certain overload factor.In this case the proper thermal time constant must be calculated.

Example:The drive is desired to trip if the motor current exceeds 170% of the motor nominal current formore than 1 minute.Selected tripping base level is 106%. TRIP LIM LOAD I1 (28.04) = 112%.



0.5 1.0 5.0 10 100

100

120

140

160

180

200

240

260

CurrentId/ %

Time (min)


Figur 6-13 Motor load curve.

Note: this is an example and does not necessarily correspond to any motor !

Using formula (1) we can calculate a correct value for τ:

Formula:

1.72 * ( 1 - e -1/τ ) = 1.12 (3)

Solving the equation concerning τ :

2.89 - 2.89 * e -1/τ = 1.12 (4)

1.77 / 2.89 = e -1/τ (5)

ln 1.77 / 2.89 = - 1/τ (6)τ = 1 / 0.49 (7)τ = 2.04 min

Select TEMP MODEL1(2) TC = (60 * 2.04) sec = 122 sec

6.12.3 Klixon

The temperature of the motor can also be supervised by means of a Klixon.TheKlixon is a thermal switch opening it’s contact at a defined temperature. This can beused for supervision of the temperature by connecting the switch to a digital input ofthe DCS600. The digital inputs for the Klixon(s) are selected by the parameter

MOT1 KLIXONSEL (28.18) Select DI for motor 1MOT1 KLIXONSEL (28.25) Select DI for motor 2



6.12.4 Armature Overvoltage

The setting of the armature overvoltage limit is based on the nominal supply voltagevalue (=par. 42.6). The limit is set into the parameter

ARMAT OVERVOLT LEV (28.22)

Setting 100 % means equal to the setting of parameter 42.6 (=NOM SUPPLY VOLT):

Exceeding this limit causes the fault "28 ARM_OVOLT".


7 Chapter 7 - Par ameters

7.1 OverviewThis chapter explains the function of, and valid selections for, each DCC600 parameter.

7.2 Parameter GroupsThe DCC 600 parameters are arranged into groups by their function.Figure 7-1 illustrates the organisation of the parameter groups. Chapter 2– Overview of DCC 600 Programming explains how to select and set theparameters. Refer to Chapter 3 – Start-up Data and Chapter 4 – ControlOperations for more information on the Start-up Data and Actual Signals.Some parameters that are not in use in the current application arehidden to simplify programming.

CAUTION! Exercise caution when configuring I/O connections as it ispossible to use one I/O connection to control several operations. If an I/Ois programmed for some purpose the setting remains, even if you selectthe I/O for another purpose with another parameter.

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS

DRIVE

20 LIMITS

23 SPEED CTRL24 TORQUE CTRL

28 MOTOR PROTECTION

CRANE MODULE GROUPS

60 LOCAL OPERATION

61 SPEED MONITOR62 TORQUE MONITOR

63 FAST STOP64 CRANE

65 LOGIC HANDLER66 TORQUE PROVING

67 MECH.BRAKE CONTROL68 POWER OPTIMIZATION

69 REFERENCE HANDLER70 POSITION MEASUREM.

71 FIELD BUS COMM.72 MASTER/FOLLOWER

OPTION MODULES

50 PULSE ENCODER51 COMM MODULE

START-UP DATA

99 START-UP DATA98 OPTION MODULES

92 DATASET TR ADR

DCC 600PARAMETERGROUPS

17 TEST GEN PAR

13 ANALOG INPUT14 I/O OUTPUTS

CONTROL CONNECTIONS

10 DIGITAL INPUTS

16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS15 DRIVE LOGIC

41 MOTOR NOM VAL42 MEASUREMENT

DC CONTROLLERS

40 UNDERVOLT MONIT

43 CURRENT CONTROL

46 EMF CONTROL44 FIELD EXCITATION

80 SHARED MOTION

Figure 7-1 Parameter Groups

Chapter 7 - Parameters

7-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual

7.2.1 Group 10 Digital InputsThese parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running,

The Range/Unit column in Table 7-1 below shows the allowableparameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters indetail.

Table 7-1 Group 10.

Parameter Range/Unit Description1 BRAKE ACKN SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6;

DI7;DI8Brake acknowledgedigital input

2 ZERO POS SEL NOT USED; DI2, DI6;EXT DI9 … EXT DI15

Zero position digitalinput (Stand alone)

3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL See parameter 10.2 Slowdown digital input(Stand alone)

4 FAST STOP-N SEL See parameter 10.2 Fast stop digital input(Stand alone)

6 SYNC SEL. NOT USED; DI2; DI6,DI7; DI8; EXT DI9 …EXT DI15

Synchronisation digitalinput

8 STEP REF2 SEL See parameter 10. 2 Step reference 2 digitalinput (Stand alone)



11 HIGH SPEED SEL See parameter 10. 2 High speed digital input(Stand alone)

12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL See parameter 10.1 Snag load digital input13 ACCELERATE SEL See parameter 10. 2 Accelerate digital input

(Stand alone)

1 BRAKE ACKN SEL Selection of digital input for signal BRAKE ACKN

NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8

2 ZERO POS SEL Selection of digital input for signal ZERO POS, used in Stand alonemode.

NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15

3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL Selection of digital input for signal SLOWDOWN-N, used in Stand alonemode.




4 FAST STOP-N SEL Selection of digital input for signal FAST STOP-N, used in Stand alonemode.


6 SYNC SEL Selection of digital input for signal SYNC, used to make Hwsynchronisation of position counter.

NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15

8 STEP REF 2 SEL Selection of digital input for signal STEP REF 2, used in Stand alonemode, with Step Joystick or Step Radio control.






11 HIGH SPEED SEL Selection of digital input for signal HIGH SPEED, used in Stand alonemode, to enable Power optimising speed ref.


12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL Selection of digital input for signal SNAG LOAD-N, used in Fieldbusmode to activate Fast stop 2 during hoisting only, with speed > 1 %.

NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8

13 ACCELERATE SEL Selection of digital input for signal ACCELERATE, used in Stand alonemode, with Motor Pot control.




7.2.2 Group 13 Analogue Inputs

These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running, The Range/Unit column in Table 7-2 below shows the allowable

parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters indetail.

NOTE: Updating interval for AI1 and AI2 is 40 ms, and for AI3 (Speedcorrection) the updating interval is 10 ms.

Table 7-2 Group 13.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 SCALE AI1 0.000 … 10.000 Scaling factor for AI12 SCALE AI2 0.000 … 10.000 Scaling factor for AI23 SCALE AI3 0.000 … 10.000 Scaling factor for AI34 AN IN TACH HI VAL -32767 … 32767 Value corresponding to

the maximum input ofthe analogue tachoinput

5 AN IN TACH LO VAL -32767 … 32767 Value corresponding tothe minimum input ofthe analogue tachoinput

1 SCALE AI1 Scaling factor for analogue input AI1 signal.



4 AN IN TACH HI VAL Value corresponding to the maximum input of the analogue tacho input.20.000 equals 100 % speed (see parameter 69.1).

5 AN IN TACH LO VAL Value corresponding to the maximum input of the analogue tacho input.20.000 equals 100 % speed (see parameter 69.1).



7.2.3 Group 14 I/O OutputsThese parameter values can only be altered when the DCC 600 isstopped. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-3 belowshows the allowableparameter values. The text following below explains the parameters indetail.NOTE: Updating interval for Relay outputs is 40 ms.

Table 7-3 Group 14.

Parameter Range/Unit Description1 DO4 OUTPUT Refer to text below.2 DO5 OUTPUT Refer to text below.3 DO6 OUTPUT Refer to text below.4 DO7 OUTPUT Refer to text below.5 DO8 OUTPUT Refer to text below.6 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT 0 … 10 000 mV Analogue output 1

voltage at nominal value7 ANOUT 1 OFFSVOLT

-10 000 … 10 000 mV Offset voltage toanalogue output 1

8 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL -32768 .. 32767 Nominal value of signalat analogue output 1

9 AN OUT 1 INDEX 0 … 19999 Index of the signalconnected to analogueoutput 1

10 AN OUT 2 NOMVOLT

0 … 10 000 mV Analogue output 2voltage at nominal value

11 ANOUT 2 OFFSVOLT

-10 000 … 10 000 mV Offset voltage toanalogue output 2

12 AN OUT 2 NOM VAL -32768 … 32767 Nominal value of signalat analogue output 2

13 AN OUT 2 INDEX 0 … 19999 Index of the signalconnected to analogueoutput 2

1 DO4 OUTPUT This parameter allows you to select which information is indicated withdigital output 4.

NOT USED

READYThe DCC 600 is ready for ON-order. The relay is not energised if: the“Electrical disconnect” input, e.g. DI4, is open or a fault exists.

RUNNINGThe DCC 600 has been started with speed and torque controllers active.

FAULTA fault has occurred. Refer to Chapter 8– Fault Tracing for more details.

FAULT-NRelay energised when power is applied, and de-energised upon a faulttrip.



CONTROL LOCControl location. Indication if External or Local control mode is selectedfrom panel. CONTROL LOC = False indicates Local control mode (panelcontrol).

BRAKE LIFTSignal for controlling the mechanical brake.

WATCHDOG-N

Indicates: Communication supervision (MAS OSC FLT), External fault(EXT FAULT) and Brake long falltime (BRAKE LONG FTIME) of thebrake. Also indicating if CPU Stalls out. This signal should be used togive Emergency Stop to crane drive.NOTE: Communication supervision only available in Fieldbus mode.

USER 1 OR 2

Indicates if User Macro 1 is loaded (=0), or if User Macro 2 is loaded(=1).

REVERSE

Indicates if motor speed is negative.

MOT OVERSP

Fault signal indication for motor overspeed trip (level set with parameter61.3)

RDY FOR RUN

Indicates that fan, field and main contactors are on and drive ready for astart order.

2 DO5 OUTPUT Refer to Parameter 14.1 DO4 OUTPUT.




6 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT Analogue output 1 voltage at nominal value.

7 ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT Offset voltage of analogue output 1.

8 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL Nominal value of signal at analogue output 1.

9 AN OUT 1 INDEX Index of the signal connected to analogue output 1. Example: 204 meansGroup 2 signal 04; speed error neg.

10 AN OUT 2 NOM VOLT Analogue output 2 voltage at nominal value.

11 ANOUT 2 OFFS VOLT Offset voltage of analogue output 2.



12 AN OUT 2 NOM VAL Nominal value of signal at analogue output 2.

13 AN OUT 2 INDEX Index of the signal connected to analogue output 2. Example: 204 meansGroup 2 signal 04; speed error neg.



7.2.4 Group 15 Drive LogicThese parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running.

The Range/Unit column in Table 7-4 below shows the allowableparameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters indetail.NOTE: Updating interval for Analogue outputs is 40 ms.

Table 7-4 Group 15.


2 DRIVE MODE 0 … 22 DRIVE MODESELECTOR

3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE; MOTOR1; MOTOR 2;MOTOR 1 + 2

THERMAL MODELSELECTOR

4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT;DELAYED

POWER LOSS TRIP

5 USED FEX TYPE 0 … 13 SELECTION FORUSED FIELD EXCITERTYPE

6 FIELD CONTRL MODE FIX; EMF;FIX/REV;EMF/REV;FIX/OPTI/REV;EMF/OPTI/REV;FIX/OPTI;EMF/OPTI

FIELD CONTROLOPERATING MODE

7 EXT FAN ACK MODE TRIP; ALARM;NO SUPERVIS

EXTERNAL FANACKNOWLEDGEMODE

10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED;ENABLEDALWAYS

FIELD HEATINGSELECTOR

11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE;ENABLE

FIELD HEATING FORMOTOR 1

12 FLD HEAT 2 SEL DISABLE;ENABLE

FIELD HEATING FORMOTOR 2

17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms MAIN SUPPLY OFFDELAY

18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED; DI1… DI8

DC-BREAKER´SACKNOWLEDGEINPUT SELECTION

19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms DC BREAKER OFFDELAY



2 DRIVE MODE Drive mode selector for several auto- and manual tuning procedures aswell as for the thyristor diagnosis. After autotuning of the armature orfield current controller, or after the thyristor diagnosis, drive mode is resetto 0. If error(s) occur during the selected procedure, drive mode is set to–1. The reason of the error can be seen from the signal Commissioningstatus (6.02).

0: Normal mode

1: Reserved

2: Reserved

3: Autotuning of the armature current controller

4: Manual tuning of the armature current controller

5: Autotuning of the 1st field exciter’s current controller

6: Reserved

7: Manual tuning of the 1st field exciter

8: Manual tuning of the 2nd field exciter

9: Manual tuning of the speed controller

10. Reserved

11: Manual tuning of the EMF controller

12: Reserved

13: Thyristor diagnosis

20: Reserved

21: Reserved

22: Save the type code parameters of the converter to the SDCS-CON-2 board’s internal FLASH memory. This has to be doneafter changing the SDCS-CON-2 board or after changing thephysical type of the converter.

3 THERM MODEL SEL Thermal model selector:

NONE

MOTOR 1: activates thermal model of motor 1.

MOTOR 2: activates thermal model of motor 2.

MOTOR 1 + 2: activates thermal model of both motors



4 PWRLOSS TRIP The action taken, when the mains voltage drops below the limit definedby parameter u net min 2 (40.02)

IMMEDIAT: The drive is tripped immediately.

DELAYED: The drive is tripped if the mains voltage doesn’t returnwithin the time defined by parameter pwr down time(40.03).

5 USED FEX TYPE Selection for used field exciter type

0: No field exciter

ABB field exciter, control via serial communication (FEX) link

1: internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1

2: Internal SDCS-FEX-2 or external DCF503/504

3: External DCF503/504 as second field exciter

4: Internal SDCS-FEX-2 or external DCF503/504 as first fieldexciter and external DCF503/504 as second field exciter.

External field exciter, control via AI/DI (alien field exciters)

5: External field exciter, acknowledge through DI4




9: External field exciter, acknowledge through AITAC

10: External field exciter, acknowledge through AI1




DCF503/504: check 1st/second field exciter jumper from HW-documentation.

6 FIELD CONTRL MODE Field control operating mode for field exciter no.1 (Motor 1).

FIX: no EMF-control (constant field)no field reversal

EMF: EMF-controlno field reversal

FIX/REV: no EMF-control (constant field)field reversal



EMF/REV: EMF-controlfield reversal

FIX/OPTI/REV: no EMF-control (constant field)OPTITORQUE, field reversal

EMF/OPTI/REV: EMF-controlOPTITORQUE, field reversal

FIX/OPTI: no EMF-control (constant field)OPTITORQUE, no field reversal

EMF/OPTI: EMF-controlOPTITORQUE, no field reversal

7 EXT FAN ACK MODE The action taken, if the external fan acknowledge is not “ON” within 3 secafter the “ON”-command

TRIP: drive is tripped

ALARM: only alarm

NO SUPERVIS: no supervision

10 FIELD HEAT SEL Enable field heating after opening the main contactor. After 10 sec“OFF”-time the field reference is reduced.

DISABLED: disable field heating

ENABLED: enable field heating

ALWAYS: field is heated, even when the “ON”command is 0

11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL Enable field heating for motor 1 after “START”=0 and “RDYRUN”=1.After 10 sec “START=0”-time the field reference is reduced.

DISABLE: disable field heating

ENABLE: enable field heating

12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL Enable field heating for motor 2 after “START”=0 and “RDYRUN”=1.After 10 sec “START=0”-time the field reference is reduced.

DISABLE: disable field heating

ENABLE: enable field heating

17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL Delay of switching off the main supply (command “main supply OFF”)after electrical disconnection or overcurrent.

18 DC BREAK ACK SEL Selection of DI channel for the DC-breaker’s (active low) acknowledgesignal.

19 DC BREAK OFF DEL Delay of opening the DC breaker after starting the dynamic braking.



7.2.5 Group 16 System Ctr InputsThese parameter values can only be altered with the DCC 600 stopped.The Range/Unit column in Table 7-5 below shows the allowableparameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters indetail.

Table 7-5 Group 16


2 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN;LOCKED

Parameter lock input.

3 PASS CODE 0 ... 30 000 Parameter lock passcode.

4 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL; DI2,DI6, DI7; DI8

Fault reset inputselector.

5 USER MACRO CHSRCE

NOT SEL; DI2;DI6; DI7;DI8;EXT DI9; EXTDI10; COMMMODULE

Restores parameters touser macro settingvalues.

6 SHARED MOTIONSEL

OFF; ON;FORCE MOT 2

Shared motionselection, or “forceparameters to motor 2values”

2 PARAMETER LOCK This parameter selects the state of the Parameter Lock. With ParameterLock you can inhibit unauthorised parameter changes.

OPEN

Parameter Lock is open. Parameters can be altered.

LOCKED

Parameter Lock is closed from the Control Panel. Parameters cannot bealtered. Only entering the valid code at Parameter 16.3 PASS CODE canopen the Parameter Lock.

3 PASS CODE This parameter selects the Pass Code for the Parameter Lock. Thedefault value of this parameter is 0. In order to open the Parameter Lockchange the value to 358. After the Parameter Lock is opened the value isautomatically changed back to 0.

4 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8

If you select NOT SEL, fault reset can only be executed from the ControlPanel keypad (Exception: See under “Note” below). If a digital input isselected, fault reset is executed from an external switch, if in Externalcontrol mode, or from the Control Panel. Reset from a digital input isactivated by opening a normally closed contact (negative edge on digitalinput).



Note: Reset from Fieldbus Command word is always available in bothLocal and External control. Reset from Fieldbus Command word (RESETOVR) is activated on positive edge of signal.

5 USER MACRO NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9; EXT DI10; COMM MODULECH SRCE

This parameter enables the selection of the desired User Macro via adigital input or Fieldbus communication in the following way:

When the state of the specified digital input or Fieldbus signal changesfrom high to low (on negative edge) User Macro 1 is restored. When thestate of the specified digital input or Fieldbus signal changes from low tohigh (on positive edge) User Macro 2 is restored.

If the required User Macro does not exist a fault indication is displayed:

0+?6>?=/<7+-<

The User Macro used can be changed via a digital input or Fieldbuscommunication (edge triggered) only after the drive is stopped, i.e.Running = 0. During the change the drive will not start. Theacknowledgement signal USER 1 OR 2 (digital output or Fieldbus)indicates when the change is completed and the drive can be startedagain.

6 SHARED MOTION SEL Selection of Shared Motion.OFFShared motion logic and parameters are not active.ONShared motion logic and parameters are active.NOTE! –Presumes that par. 16.5 is left on (default) value ‘NOT SEL’.FORCE MOT 2Shared motion logic and parameters are active. The parameters areforced to motor 2 values. (To be used during commissioning only).NOTE! –Also presumes that par. 16.5 is left on (default) value ‘NOT SEL’.



7.2.6 Group 17 Test Gen ParThese parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running,

The Range/Unit column in Table 7-6 below shows the allowableparameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters indetail.

Table 7-6 Group 17


1 POT 1 -32768 …32767

CONSTANT TESTREFERENCE 1

2 POT 2 -32768 …32767

CONSTANT TESTREFERENCE 2

3 SQR WAVE PERIOD 10 … 100000ms

SQUARE WAVEPERIOD TIME

4 TEST REF SELECT 0; POT1POT2SQR WAV;TST REF

TEST REFERENCESELECTION

1 POT 1 Constant test reference 1 for the manual tuning function. Used also forthe square wave generator.

2 POT 2 Constant test reference 2 for the manual tuning function. Used also forthe square wave generator.

3 SQR WAVE PERIOD The time period of the square wave generator.

4 TEST REF SELECT Manual tuning reference selection for the function selected by the drivemode parameter (15.02)

0: 0

1: POT1

2: POT2

3: SQR WAV

4: TST REF



7.2.7 Group 20 LimitsThese parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. TheRange/Unit column in Table 7-7 below shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 7-7 Group 20.

Parameter Range/Unit Description1 MINIMUM SPEED -12 000 … 0 rpm PAGEREFNegative

speed reference limit.2 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 … 12 000 rpm Positive speed

reference limit.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE 0.5 ... 325 % Maximum positive

output torque.6 MINIMUM TORQUE -325 … -1.0 % Minimum negative

output torque.12 CUR LIM MOTBRIDG

0 … 400 % Current limit for motorbridge.

13 CUR LIM GENBRIDG

-400… 400 % Current limit forgenerator bridge.

14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 0 … 165 DEG Maximum firing angle.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 0 … 165 DEG Minimum firing angle.16 FIELD1 OVRCURLEV

0 … 200 % Field overcurrent limitfor motor 1 .

17 FIELD2 OVRCURLEV

0 … 200 % Field overcurrent limitfor motor 2.

1 MINIMUM SPEED Negative speed reference limit. Internally limited to –((69.01) x 32767 /20000) … 0 rpm.

2 MAXIMUM SPEED Positive speed reference limit. Internally limited to 0 … ((69.01) x 32767 /20000 rpm.

5 MAXIMUM TORQUE Maximum positive output torque in per cent of the nominal motor torque.The output torque of the torque selector (including load compensationand torque step) is limited against this value.

6 MINIMUM TORQUE Minimum negative output torque in per cent of the nominal motor torque.The output torque of the torque selector (including load compensationand torque step) is limited against this value.

12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDGE Current limit for motor bridge related to the nominal motor current.

13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDGE Current limit for generator bridge related to the nom. motor current.Note! This limit low-limited to 0, if single quadrant type converter.

14 MAX FIRING ANGLE Maximum firing angle in degrees.

15 MIN FIRING ANGLE Minimum firing angle in degrees.

16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV Field overcurrent limit for motor 1 in per cent of the motor 1’s nominalfield current.

17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV Field overcurrent limit for motor 2 in per cent of the motor 2’s nominalfield current.



7.2.8 Group 23 Speed CtrlThese parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. TheRange/Unit column in Table 7-8 shows the allowable parameter values.The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 7-8 Group 23.


1 KPS 0 … 325 Relative gain of the speedcontroller.

2 TIS 0 … 32767 ms Integral active time of thespeed controller.

3 DERIVATION TIME 0 … 10000 ms Derivation time for the speedcontroller

4 ACC COMP DERTIME

0 … 100 s Derivation time used duringacceleration in order tocompensate the inertia.

5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 … 10 000 ms Actual speed filter time.6 SPEED STEP (onlyfor DW)

-2457 … 2457rpm

Speed step input forDrivesWindow step gen.

The values of these parameters define how the output of the SpeedController changes when there is a difference (error value) between theactual speed and the displays typical step responses of the SpeedController.

Step responses can be seen by monitoring Actual Signal 1.1 MOTORSPEED.

The dynamic performance of the speed control at low speeds can beimproved by increasing the relative gain and decreasing the integrationtime.

Speed controller output is the reference for the torque controller. Thetorque reference is limited by Parameters 20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE and20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE.



Speed

Step height

A: Undercompensated: 23.2 TIS too long and 23.1 KPS too lowB: Normally tuned, autotuningC: Normally tuned. Better dynamic performance than with BD: Overcompensated: 23.2 TIS too short and 23.1 KPS too high

A B DC

t

Figure 7-2 Step responses of the Speed Controller with different settings.1 to 10 % reference step is used.

Actualspeed

Speedreference

Errorvalue

ProportionalIntegral

Derivative

DerivativeAccelerationCompensation

Torquereference

Figure 7-3 Speed controller, a simplified block diagram.

1 KPS Relative gain of the speed controller. With the value 1, a speed error of10 % of the maximum speed (69.1) causes a torque reference of 10 % ofthe motor’s nominal torque.

2 TIS Integral active time of the speed controller. The time within the integralpart of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.Setting TIS to 32767 ms disables the integral part of the controller; theintegrator’s accumulator is cleared.

3 DERIVATION TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes.The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output isboosted during the change. The derivation makes the control moreresponsive for the disturbances. If derivation time is set to zero, thecontroller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller.



Gain = Kp = 1TI = Integration time > 0TD = Derivation time > 0TS = Sample time period = 2 ms∆e = Error value change betweentwo samplesError Value

Controller Output

Kp ⋅ e

Kp ⋅ e∆e Ts

Kp ⋅ TD ⋅

e = Error value

tTI

%

Figure 7-4 Speed Controller Output after an error step when the errorremains constant

NOTE: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoderis used.

4 ACC COMP DER TIME Derivation time for compensation of acceleration. In order to compensateinertia during acceleration the derivative of the reference is added to theoutput of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action isdescribed in section 3 DERIVATION TIME above.

As a general rule, set this parameter to a value from 50 to 100 % of thesum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the drivenmachine.

No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation

Speed Reference

Actual Speed

%

t

Speed Reference

Actual Speed

%

t

5 SP ACT FILT TIME Filter time constant for the actual speed signal.

6 SPEED STEP Speed reference step input (without ramp). Only to be used withDrivesWindow step test generator.



7.2.9 Group 24 Torque CtrlThese parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running.The Range/Unit column in Table 7-9 below shows the allowableparameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters indetail.These parameters are not visible in Follower drive (with M/F CTRLmacro).

Table 7-9 Group 24.


1 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 ...120.00 s

Time for reference from 0 to therated torque.

2 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 ...120.00 s

Time for reference from the ratedtorque to 0.

3 TORQ STEP -325.00 …325.00 %

Torque step input forDrivesWindow step gen.

1 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the time required for the reference to increase from zero to therated torque.

2 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the time required for the reference to decrease from the ratedtorque to zero.

Note: These parameters do not effect the torque reference sent frommaster to follower drive in Master/Follower control mode (usingMaster/Follower bus).

3 TORQ STEP Torque reference step input (without ramp). Only to be used withDrivesWindow step test generator



7.2.10 Group 28 Motor Protection

Table 7-10 Group 28.

Parameter Range/Unit Description1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC 0… 5400 s Thermal time constant for motor

1.2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR 0… 245 % Thermal model 1 nominal

current.3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 10… 130 % Alarm limit of the calculated

motor’s load integral (model 1).4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 10… 130 % Tripping limit of the calculated

motor’s load integral (model 1).5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 0… 5400 s Thermal time constant for motor

2.6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 0… 245 % Thermal model 2 nominal

current.7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 10… 130 % Alarm limit of the calculated

motor temperature (model 2).8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 10… 130 % Tripping limit of the calculated

motor temperature (model 2).9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED;

1 x PT1002 x PT1003 x PT100;PTC;SCALED A/D

Motor 1 temperaturemeasurement mode.

10 ALARM LIM M1TEMP

-10XXX …4000XXX

Temperature alarm limit formeasured temperature ofMotor 1.

11 FAULT LIM M1TEMP

-10XXX …4000XXX

Temperature trip limit formeasured temperature ofMotor 1.

12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED;1 x PT100;2 x PT100;3 x PT100;PTC;SCALED A/D

Motor 2 temperaturemeasurement mode.

13 ALARM LIM M2TEMP

-10xxx …4000xxx

Temperature alarm limit formeasured temperature of motor2. The unit depend on parameter(28.12).

14 FAULT LIM M2TEMP

-10xxx …4000xxx

Temperature trip limit formeasured temperature ofMotor 2.

18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED;DI4; NOTUSED; DI6;DI7; DI8

DI selection for motor 1temperature switch.

19 EARTH CUR FLTSEL

NOT USED;ACTIVATED

Selection for earth faultmonitoring.




20 EARTH CUR FLTLIM

0… 20 A Earth fault current tripping level.

21 EARTH CUR FLTDEL

0… 10000 ms Earth fault time delay.

22 ARMAT OVRVOLTLEV

25… 500 % Armature overvoltage level.

23 SPD MEAS MONLEV

0 .. 7500 rpm Speed measurement monitoringlevel.

24 SPD EMF MON LEV 0 … 1500 V Speed measurement monitoring,EMF voltage level.

25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED;DI4; NOTUSED; DI6;DI7; DI8

DI selection for motor 2temperature switch.

1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC Thermal time constant for motor 1. The time within the temperature risesto 63 % of the nominal value.

2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR Thermal model 1 nominal current. At this current, the output of thethermal model 1 will reach 100 % after 5 x temp model 1 TC (28.01).

3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 Alarm limit of the calculated motor’s load integral (model 1).

4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 Tripping limit of the calculated motor’s load integral (model 1).

5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC Thermal time constant for motor 2. The time within the temperature risesto 63 % of the nominal value.

6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR Thermal model 1 nominal current. At this current, the output of thethermal model 1 will reach 100 % after 5 x temp model 1 TC (28.05).

7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 Alarm limit of the calculated motor temperature (model 2).

8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 Tripping limit of the calculated motor temperature (model 2).

9 MOTOR 1 TEMP SEL Motor 1 temperature measurement mode, using analogue input channel2:

NOT USED

1 • PT100 Cels

2 • PT100 Cels

3 • PT100 Cels

PTC Ohm

SCALED A/D

10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP Temperature alarm limit for measured temperature of motor 1. The unitsdepend on parameter (28.09).

11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP Temperature trip limit for measured temperature of motor 1. The unitsdepend on parameter (28.09).



12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL Motor 2 temperature measurement mode, using analogue inputchannel 3:

NOT USED

1 • PT100 Cels

2 • PT100 Cels

3 • PT100 Cels

PTC Ohm

SCALED A/D

13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP Temperature alarm limit for measured temperature of motor 2. The unitsdepend on parameter (28.12).

14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP Temperature trip limit for measured temperature of motor 2. The unitsdepend on parameter (28.12).

18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL DI selection for motor 1 temperature switch. The drive is tripped, if theselected DI is activated.

NOT USED

DI4

NOT USED

DI6

DI7

DI8

19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL Selection for earth fault monitoring

NOT USED

ACTIVATED

20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM Earth fault current tripping level.

21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL The time delay the earth fault is activated after.

22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV Armature overvoltage level in per cent of the supply voltage (42.06).

23 SPD MEAS MON LEV Minimum absolute value the measured speed (pulse encoder, is abovethe tacho) must be when the measured EMF voltage (1.09) is above thelimit (28.24). If the measured speed is below this limit, the drive trips(measurement fault). Internal limited to 0 … (69.01) rpm.

24 SPD EMF MON LEV The speed measurement monitoring function is activated, when themeasured EMF voltage (1.09) is above the limit programmed to thisparameter. See (28.23).



25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL DI selection for motor 2 temperature switch. The drive is tripped, if theselected DI is activated.

NOT USED

DI4

NOT USED

DI6

DI7

DI8



7.2.11 Group 30 Fault FunctionsThese parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. The

Range/Unit column in Table 7-11 shows the allowable parameter values.The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 7-11 Group 30


2 PANEL LOSS FAULT; NO Panel loss operation.3 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL; DI2;

DI6; DI7; DI8External fault input.

12 MASTER FAULTFUNC

FAULT; NO;WARNING(visible only infieldbus mode)

Operates when there is aFieldbus communication fault

13 COMM FLT TIME-OUT

0.10… 60.00s(visible only infieldbus mode)

Communication fault timedelay.

2 PANEL LOSS Defines the operation of the DCC 600 if the Control Panel selected asthe control location for the DCC 600 stops communicating.

CAUTION: If you select NO, make sure that it is safe to continueoperation in case communication with the Control Panel fails.

FAULT

Fault indication is displayed (if there are any Control Panelscommunicating on the link) and the DCC 600 stops (coast stop + setbrake).

NO

No protection provided

3 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8

This selection defines the digital input used for an external fault signal. Ifan external fault occurs, i.e. digital input drops to 0 V, the DCC 600stops.

12 MASTER FAULT FUNC This parameter defines the operation when a fault is detected in thecommunication between the drive and the fieldbus.FAULTFault indication MASTER FLT is diplayed and the DCC600 trips.NONo activity wanted.WARNINGWarning indication MASTER FLT is displayed.

13 COMM FLT TIME-OUT Warning indication MASTER FLT is displayed. This parameter definesthe delay time before activating the fault (See par. 30.12).



7.2.12 Group 40 Undervolt Monit


Parameter Range/Unit Description1 U NET MIN 1 0 … 130 % Upper limit for mains

undervoltage monitoring.2 U NET MIN 2 0 … 130 % Lower limit for mains

undervoltage monitoring.3 POWER DOWN TIME 0 … 10000 ms Power down time.

1 U NET MIN 1 Upper limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in per cent of the supplyvoltage (42.06). If the mains voltage drops below this limit, the controllersare blocked. An undervoltage trip is generated, if the mains voltagedoesn’t recover within the time defined by parameter power down time(40.03).

2 U NET MIN 2 Lower limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in per cent of the supplyvoltage (42.06).

Pwrloss trip (15.04) = IMMEDIAT:If the mains voltage drops below this limit, an undervoltage trip isgenerated.

Pwrloss trip (15.04) = DELAYED:If the mains voltage drops below this limit, the controllers are blocked. Anundervoltage trip is generated, if the mains voltage doesn’t recover withinthe time defined by parameter pwr down time (40.03).

3 POWER DOWN TIME Within this time the mains voltage must return. Otherwise anundervoltage trip will be generated.



7.2.13 Group 41 Motor Nom Val



3 MOT 1 NOM FLDCUR

0.3 … 655.3 A Nominal field current of the 1st

motor.10 CUR REF SLOPE 0 … 30 %/ms Current reference slope11 ARM L 0 … 32767 Armature inductance.12 ARM R 0 … 32767 Armature resistance.14 FLD CUR @ 70%FLUX

0.0 …100.0% Field current for 40% flux.

15 FLD CUR @ 70%FLUX


16 FLD CUR @ 90%FLUX


17 MOT 2 NOM FLDCUR

0.3 … 655.3 A Nominal field current of the 2nd

motor.19 INT EMF REF 10 % … 146 % Nominal EMF value; used as

local EMF reference.

3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR Nominal field current of the 1st motor.

10 CUR REF SLOPE Current reference slope in per cent of the nominal converter current per1ms (related to control cycle time 3.3 ms). This parameter limits thecurrent reference slope (di/dt limitation) at the input of the currentcontroller.

11 ARM L Relative inductance of the armature circuit.

ARM_L = LA[mH]*CONV_NOM_CURR(4.05)*245

NOM_SUPPLY_VOLT(42.06)*scantime

WhereLA[mH] = armature (load) inductance in mHScan time = 3,33 (50 Hz mains) or 2,77 ms (60 Hz)

12 ARM R Relative resistance of the armature circuit.

ARM_R = 22444* RA [Ω] * CONV_NOM_CURR(4.05)*245

NOM_SUPPLY_VOLT(42.06)

WhereRA [Ω] = armature (load) resistance

14 FLD CUR @ 40% FLUX Field current for 40 % flux. See chapter 6.4.9 for details.15 FLD CUR @ 70% FLUX Field current for 70 % flux.16 FLD CUR @ 90% FLUX Field current for 90 % flux.



17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR Nominal field current of the 2nd motor.

19 INT EMF REF Nominal EMF value; used as local EMF reference.

Scaling: 100 % equals NOM SUPPLY VOLT (42.6) voltage level.

[ ] ( )( )42.6_VOLTNOM_SUPPLY

1000.9599.5VOLTAGEMOTOR_NOM_:%settingApprox.

∗∗



7.2.14 Group 42 Measurement


Parameter Range/Unit Description1 MAINS PHASEORDER

R – T – S;R – S − T

Main supply phase order.

5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 20 … 400 % Armature overcurrent tripping.6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT 50 V … 1400 A Nominal supply voltage.7 S CONV NOM CURR 0 A … 30000 A Set nominal converter current.8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0 V … 2000 V Set voltage measurement

class.9 S MAX BRIDGETEMP

0 … 150 Cels Set tripping level of converterheat sink temperature.

10 S CONVERTERTYPE

NONE; C1; C2;C3; C4

Set converter type.

11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE;1 QUADRANT;4 QUADRANT

Set quadrant type of theconverter.

12 TORQ ACT FTC 0 … 30000 ms Time constant of the motortorque (1.05) low pass filter.

1 MAIN PHASE ORDER Main supply phase order. If the measured phase order does not matchwith this parameter, the fault “Phase Sequence Order” is generated.

R – T – S

R – S − T

5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL Armature overcurrent tripping level in per cent of the nominal convertercurrent.

6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT Nominal supply voltage. The default value of this parameter is theconverter nominal voltage (4.04): However, if the value of the setnominal voltage (42.08) isn’t zero, this value is used as default valueinstead.

7 S CONV NOM CURR Set nominal converter current.

Note! This parameter overwrites the nominal current of the converterdefined by the type code resistors.

0: type code resistors are in use

<>0: type code resistors are bypassed

8 S CONV NOM VOLT Set voltage measurement class.

Note! This parameter overwrites the voltage measurement settingsdefined by the type code resistors.





9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP Set tripping level of converter heat sink temperature.

Note! This parameter overwrites the max. bridge temperature defined bythe type code resistors.



10 S CONVERTER TYPE Set converter type.

NONE

C1

C2

C3

C4

Note! This parameter overwrites the converter type defined by the typecode resistors.

NONE: type code resistors are in use

<> NONE: type code resistors are bypassed

11 S QUADRANT TYPE Set quadrant type of the converter.

NONE

1 QUADRANT: 1-quadrant converter

4 QUADRANT: 4-quadrant converter

Note! This parameter overwrites the quadrant type of the converterdefined by the type code resistors.

NONE: type code resistors are in use

<> NONE: type code resistors are bypassed

12 TORQ ACT FTC Time constant of the motor torque (1.05) low pass filter.



7.2.15 Group 43 Current Control



2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN 3 … 2997 P-gain of PI currentcontroller.

3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN 0 … 31968 Integral time constant of PIcurrent controller.

6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT 0 … 100% Current level betweendiscontinuous andcontinuous current.

10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT; FC1WARN; FC2FAULT; FC 2WARN

Current ripple monitoringselection.

11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0 … 800 % Treshhold for current ripplemonitoring (function 1) andthyristor diagnosis.

12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 0 … 800 % Treshhold for current ripplemonitoring (function 2).

15 REV GAP 0 …50 Max. allowed number ofcontrol cycles for bridgereversal.

2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN P-gain of PI current controller.

3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI current controller.

6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT Current level between discontinuous and continuous current.

10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT Selects whether the reaction on current ripple is fault or warning andwhich function is to be used.

FC 1 FAULT function 1, fault

FC 1 WARN function 1, warning

FC 2 FAULT function 2, fault

FC 2 WARN function 2, warning

11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 Treshhold for current ripple monitoring (function 1) and thyristordiagnosis.

12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 Treshhold for current ripple monitoring (function 2).

15 REV GAP If Bridge reversal takes longer than [43.15+2] control cycles, fault “65REVER FLT” is activated.1 control cycle = 3.3 ms at 50 Hz.



7.2.16 Group 44 Field Excitation



1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0 … 32767 Filter time constant for 1st

field actual current.2 P-GAIN FEX 1 0 … 4096 P-gain for 1st FEX.3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 0 … 40960 ms Integral time constant for 1st

FEX.7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0 … 32767 Filter time constant for 2nd

field actual current.8 P-GAIN FEX 2 0 … 4096 P-gain for 2nd FEX.9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 0 … 40960 ms Integral time constant for 2nd

FEX.13 FIELD 1 REF RED 0 … 100 % 1st field reduced current

reference.17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 0 … 100 % Tripping level of minimum 1st

field current.21 FIELD 2 REF RED 0 … 100 % 2nd field reduced current

reference.22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 0 … 100 % Tripping level of minimum

2nd field current.

1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC Filter time constant for 1st field actual current. Scaling: 1=10ms)

2 P-GAIN FEX 1 P-gain for 1st field exciter’s PI controller.

3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 Integral time constant for 1st field exciter’s PI controller.

7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC Filter time constant for 2nd field actual current. (Scaling: 1=10ms)

8 P-GAIN FEX 2 P-gain for 2nd field exciter’s PI controller.

9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 Integral time constant for 2nd field exciter’s PI controller.

13 FIELD 1 REF RED 1st field current reference on heating or standstill.

17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP Tripping level of minimum 1st field current.

21 FIELD 2 REF RED 2nd field current reference on heating or standstill.

22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP Tripping level of minimum 2nd field current.



7.2.17 Group 46 EMF Control



1 POS LIM EMF CON 0 … 100 % Positive limit for EMFcontroller.

2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100 … 0 % Negative limit for EMFcontroller.

3 EMF CON KP 1 … 32767 P-gain of EMF controller.4 EMF CON KI 0 … 32767 Integral time constant of

EMF controller.5 EMF CON BLOCKLEV

0 … 36 % EMF controller block level.

6 EMF ACT FILT TC 0 … 10000 ms Filter time constant for EMFactual value.

9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 0 … 10000 ms Filter time constant for EMFspeed measurement.

11 V STEP -500% … 500% Voltage step value.

1 POS LIM EMF CON Positive limit for EMF controller.

2 NEG LIM EMF CON Negative limit for EMF controller.

3 EMF CON KP P-gain of EMF controller.

4 EMF CON KI Integral time constant of EMF controller.

5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV EMF controller block level. When the measured EMF is below this limit,the EMF controller is blocked.

6 EMF ACT FILT TC Filter time constant for calculated EMF actual value at the input of theEMF controller.

9 EMF SPEED FILT TC Filter time constant for calculated EMF used for speed measurementsupervision.

11 V STEP Voltage step value in per cent of the nominal supply voltage (=42.6). Isadded to the output of the voltage reference slope function.NOTE: Only used with DrivesWindow step function.



7.2.18 Group 50 Speed Measuring



2 SPEED MEAS MODE A_- B DIR; A _-_;A _-_ B DIR;A _-_ B _-_

Encoder evaluation modeselection for encoder.

3 SPEED FB SEL CALC BY EMF;CON-ENCODER;NTAC MODULE;ANALOG TAC

Speed feedback selection.

4 ENCODER PULSENR

125 … 6000 Pulse count per revolution ofthe encoder.

2 SPEED MEAS MODE Encoder evaluation mode selection for the encoder connected to SDCS-CON-2.

A_-B DIR rising edge of track A, track B direction

A _-_ both edges of track A

A _-_ B DIR both edges of track A, track B direction

A _-_ B _-_ both edges of both tracks

3 SPEED FB SEL Speed feedback selection:

CALC BY EMF calculated by EMF

CON-ENCODER measured by encoder connected toSDCS-CON-2

NTAC MODULE Measured by encoder, connected to a PulseEncoder Interface Module, type NTAC.NOTE: Not supported in DCC600.

ANALOG TAC analogue tacho connected to AITAC input

4 ENCODER PULSE NR Pulse count per revolution of the encoder connected to SDCS-CON-2.



7.2.19 Group 51 Master AdapterFor information on these parameters see manual: Fieldbus adapterNxxA-01 Installation & Start-up Guide for the respective type used.

7.2.20 Group 60 Local operationThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-19 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 7-19 Group 60

Parameter Range/unit Description

1 LOC OPER INH True ; False Local operationinhibit.

2 LOC SPEED MAX 0.0 … 100.0 % Local speedmaximum.

3 LOC ZERO SPEED TD 0.0 ... 300.0 s Local zero speedtime delay.

1 LOC OPER INH

True

Only possible to run in External control.Note: Panel will show "L" indication even though drive is in Externalcontrol.

False

Possible to run in LOCAL (panel) control and External control

2 LOC SPEED MAX The maximum speed reference when running in LOCAL

3 LOC ZERO SPEED TD After making LOCAL START the ZERO SPEED signal has to become”0”, that is motor start running, before the time LOC ZERO SPEED TDhas expired otherwise the start order is removed and drive is switchedoff.



7.2.21 Group 61 Speed monitorThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-20 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 ZERO SPEED LEV 0.00 ...100.0 % Zero speed level

2 ZERO SPEED TIME 0...10000 ms Zero speed time

3 MOT OVERSPEED LEV 0....200 % Motor overspeedlevel

1 ZERO SPEED LEV Parameter for setting the speed level for ZERO SPEED indication, in %of parameter 69.1 "Speed scaling rpm".

2 ZERO SPEED TIME Time delay before signal ZERO SPEED is set to ”1” when the motorspeed is below ZERO SPEED LEV.

3 MOT OVERSPEED LEV If the motor speed exceeds the level determined by MOT OVERSPEEDLEV the drive trips, indicating MOT OVERSP.



7.2.22 Group 62 Torque MonitorThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-21 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 TORQ MON SEL True ; False Torque monitor select2 SP DEV LEV 0 ... 100 % Speed deviation level3 TORQ FLT TD 0...60000 ms Torque fault time

delay4 SP DER BLK LEV 0...100 % / s Speed derivative

blocking level

1 TORQ MON SEL True

Torque monitor is activated

False

Torque monitor is blocked

2 SP DEV LEV A level above SP DEV LEV means that the speed error is too high

3 TORQ FLT TD If a speed error higher than SP DEV LEV occurs, and if it lasts longerthan the time TORQ FLT TD the drive will trip, indicating TORQ FLTmessage.

4 SP DER BLK LEV The protection is blocked during acceleration and deceleration if the signof the speed error is OK and if the derivative of the actual speed is higherthan the setting of SP DER BLK LEV



7.2.23 Group 63 Fast stop The Range/Unit column in Table 7-22 shows the allowable parameter

values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1;FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3

Fast stop type 11

2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1;FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3

Fast stop type 12

1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 Parameter for selecting type of fast stop action in Fieldbus mode.Activated if signal FAST STOP 11 in Fieldbus communication Commandword (Dataset1 Word1 bit 10) is set true.

NOT USED: No activity wanted.

FAST STOP 1: Fast stop by braking on torque limit.

FAST STOP 2: Fast stop by braking with both mechanical brakeand on torque limit.

FAST STOP 3: Fast stop by braking with mechanical brake only.

2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 Parameter for selecting type of fast stop action in Stand alone mode.Activated by e.g. input Ext DI10. Refer to Parameter 63.1 for settingalternatives.



7.2.24 Group 64 CraneThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-23 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 STAND ALONE SEL True; False Stand Alone Select2 CONTIN GEAR True; False Continuous gear3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 0.0 ... 100.0 % High speed level 14 DEADZONE A 0 ... 100 % Deadzone A5 DEADZONE B 0 ... 100 % Deadzone B6 REF SHAPE 0 ... 100 Reference shape7 SLOWDOWNSPEEDREF

0 ... 100 % Slowdown speedreference

8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Zero position OK timedelay

9 TORQUE REF SCALE 0.00 ... 4.00 Torque referencescaling.

10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK; RADIOCTRL; MOTOR POT;STEP JOYST; STEPRADIO

Control type selection

11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 ... 100.0 % Minimum reference12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 0 ... 5000 ms Joystick warning time

delay13 STEP REF LEVEL1 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 114 STEP REF LEVEL2 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 215 STEP REF LEVEL3 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 316 STEP REF LEVEL4 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 4

1 STAND ALONE SEL True

Stand alone mode is selected.

False

Fieldbus mode is selected.



2 CONTIN GEAR True

Normally joystick movement zero to maximum equals zero to basespeed reference. If the power optimisation calculates a higher speedreference, than the maximum reference from the controller isrecalculated to correspond to the highest speed reached in fieldweakening.

False

Means that zero to maximum movement of the joystick is always zero tobase speed reference. If the power optimisation calculates a higherspeed reference than base speed the speed will increase to thecalculated value with the joystick in maximum position.When pulling back the joystick to e.g. 90 % the speed reference will thenbe reduced to 90 % of base speed.

3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 Joystick output (AI1) signal level to give HIGH SPEED OK signal forpower optimisation.

4 DEADZONE A Deadzone on the joystick before it starts to give reference in direction A(positive, e.g. hoisting direction)

5 DEADZONE B Deadzone on the joystick before it starts to give reference in direction B(negative, e.g. lowering direction)

6 REF SHAPE Parameter for making a parabolic curve for the reference0 = straight line20 = X2 curve100 = X3 curve

7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF Maximum speed reference level (limitation) when slow down function isactivated (e.g. Ext DI9=0). Scaling: 100% = parameter 69.1 level.

8 ZERO POS OK TD Time delay for the joystick to stay in zero position before a new startorder can be given after a stop from: trip, fast stop or joystick warning.

9 TORQUE REF SCALE Scaling of torque reference from joystick (AI.2). E.g. with TORQUE REFSCALE set to 2.0: a 100 % joystick reference will give 200 % torquereference to the torque controller

10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK

External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by using ajoystick controller, with Zero Pos (e.g. DI2), Dir A (DI7) and Dir B (DI8)contacts connected to digital inputs and analogue reference connectedto AI1 (speed control) or AI2 (torque control). Joystick supervision isactive.

RADIO CONTROL

External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by connectingsignals from a radio controller or PLC to drive I/O. Dir A and Dir B ordersconnected to DI7 and DI8. Reference connected to AI1 or AI2.



MOTOR POT

External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by using e.g. apendant controller giving direction and increase orders. Increase ordersconnected to e.g. DI2, Dir A and Dir B connected to DI7 and DI8.

STEP JOYST

External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by using ajoystick controller, with Zero Pos (e.g. DI2), Dir A (DI7) and Dir B (DI8)contacts connected to digital inputs and Step type of speed referenceconnected to digital inputs selected with parameters 10.8 – 10.10.Joystick supervision is active.

STEP RADIO

External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by connectingsignals from a radio controller or PLC to drive I/O. Dir A and Dir B ordersconnected to DI7 and DI8. Step type of speed reference connected todigital inputs selected with parameters 10.8 – 10.10.

11 MINIMUM REF Minimum speed reference in stand alone mode. Normally used withMOTOR POT control type.

12 JOYSTICK WARN TD Time delay for joystick supervision.

13 STEP REF LEVEL1 First speed reference level applied from startorder, i.e. DirA or DirB,when using STEP JOYST or STEP RADIO control types.

14 STEP REF LEVEL2 Second speed reference level applied when digital input, selected byparameter 10.8 STEP REF2 SEL, is activated (plus start order active).

15 STEP REF LEVEL3 Third speed reference level applied when digital input, selected byparameter 10.9 STEP REF3 SEL, is activated (plus step ref2 conditionsstill active).

16 STEP REF LEVEL4 Fourth speed reference level applied when digital input, selected byparameter 10.10 STEP REF4 SEL, is activated (plus step ref3 conditionsstill active).



7.2.25 Group 65 Logic handlerThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-24 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 CONTIN ON True ; False Continuing on

2 OFF TD 0.0 ... 10000.0 s Off time delay

1 CONTIN ON Contactors will remain on without time limit after the motor is stopped, ifparameter CONTIN ON = True.

2 OFF TD The time for how long the contactors shall remain on after the motor isstopped.



7.2.26 Group 66 Torque ProvingThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-25 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 TORQ PROV SEL True ; False Torque proving select2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.0 ... 100.0 s Torque proving fault

time delay3 TORQ PROV REF -200.0 ... 200.0 % Torque proving

reference4 REGEN TEST SEL True; False Regenerative bridge

test select.

1 TORQ PROV SEL True

Torque proving active (requires pulse encoder).

False

Torque proving not active.

2 TORQ PROV FLT TD Time delay for fault signal TORQ PROV FLT

3 TORQ PROV REF Torque proving reference level.

4 REGEN TEST SEL True

Torque proving test performed with both motoring (forward) andregenerative (reverse) bridge.

False

Torque proving test performed only with motoring (forward) bridge.



7.2.27 Group 67 Mechanical brake contr.The Range/Unit column in Table 7-26 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.


Parameter Range/unit Description1 BRAKE FALL TIME 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake falling time

2 BRAKE FLT TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake fault time delay3 BRAKE INT ACKN True ; False Brake internal

acknowledge select4 BRAKE LIFT TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake lift time

delay5 BRAKE LONG FT TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake long falling

time delay

1 BRAKE FALL TIME Falling time for the mechanical brake. Time for brake to set and give fullbraking torque after brake close order (brake electrical supplydisconnected).

2 BRAKE FLT TD Time delay for BRAKE FAULT signal.

3 BRAKE INT ACKN True

Internal acknowledge ” brake lifted ”, digital input signal not used.

False

External acknowledge ” brake lifted ” connected to digital input e.g. DI6.

4 BRAKE LIFT TD Time delay for brake lift order, after speed reference is connected tospeed controller.

5 BRAKE LONG FT TD Time delay for monitoring signal ”brake long falltime ”



7.2.28 Group 68 Power optimisationThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-27 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.


Parameter Range/unit Description1 POWOP SELECT True ; False Power optimisation

select2 BASE SPEED 1.0 ... 100.0 % Base speed

3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL True ; False Powop autotuneselect

4 INERTIA TOTAL UP 0.00 ... 100.00kgm2

Inertia total upwards

5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN 0.00 ... 100.00kgm2

Inertia totaldownwards

6 TQLIM UP 0.0 ... 200.0 % Powop torque limitupwards

7 TQLIM DWN 0.0 ... 200.0 % Powop torque limitdownwards

8 POWOP RESET LEV 0 ... 100 % Power optimisationreset level

1 POWOP SELECT True

Power optimisation is active (only used on hoist drive).

False

Power optimisation not active.

2 BASE SPEED Normally the speed where field weakening starts and the available RMSpower of the motor is constant. Full load torque possible for mechanicsup to this speed.

3 POWOP AUTOTUNE TrueSEL

Activates the tuning.Note: Parameter is reset to False after each calculated Total inertiavalue.

The value of the inertia can be read in actual signal no.1.24 TOTALINERTIAAn average value after running 2-3 times in each direction should thanbe entered to parameters INERTIA TOTAL UP and INERTIA TOTALDWN respectively

False

Autotune mode not active



4 INERTIA TOTAL UP Total inertia in upwards direction

5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN Total inertia in downwards direction

6 TQLIM UP Maximum load torque allowed upwards (=field weakening power limit)

7 TQLIM DWN Maximum load torque allowed downwards (=field weakening power limit)

8 POWOP RESET LEV Speed level (in % of base speed) where the calculated poweroptimisation reference will be reset to be prepared for a new calculationduring the next acceleration.



7.2.29 Group 69 Reference HandlerThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-28 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 SPEED SCALING RPM 0 ... 5000 rpm Maximum speed

2 ACC TIME FORW 0.1 ... 60.0 s Acceleration time forward3 ACC TIME REV 0.1 ... 60.0 s Acceleration time reverse4 DEC TIME FORW 0.1 ... 60.0 s Deceleration time forward5 DEC TIME REV 0.1 ... 60.0 s Deceleration time reverse6 S-RAMP TC 0.0...10.0 s S-ramp time constant7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 0.5 ... 100.0 Ramp scale local

8 SPEED REF TD 0.05 ... 10.00 s Speed reference timedelay

9 START TORQ SEL NOT USED;AUTO TQ MEM;LOAD MEAS

Start torque select

10 RAMP RATE=1 True ; False Ramp rate set equal to 1

1 SPEED SCALING RPM Setting of motor shaft rotational speed (rpm) corresponding to 100 %speed reference = maximum operating speed.NOTE: Must be set in the range of 87%…500% of the motor nominalspeed (99.08). Otherwise an alarm (SPEED SCALE) is generated

2 ACC TIME FORW Setting of acceleration ramp time forward direction (up), 0 to +100 %speed (where 100% corresponds to parameter 69.1).

3 ACC TIME REV Setting of acceleration ramp time reverse direction (down), 0 to -100 %speed (ref. parameter 69.1).

4 DEC TIME FORW Setting of deceleration ramp time forward direction, +100 to 0 % speed(ref. parameter 69.1).

5 DEC TIME REV Setting of deceleration ramp time reverse direction, -100 to 0 % speed(ref. parameter 69.1).

6 S-RAMP TC Setting of the s-curve time constant in the speed reference ramp unit.

7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL Scaling (multiplying) factor for ramp times when running in local

8 SPEED REF TD Time delay before connecting speed reference to ramp unit.



9 START TORQ SEL NOT USED: No extra starting torque.

AUTO TQ MEM: Automatic torque memory selected.

LOAD MEAS: Starting torque reference is received from ansuperior controller e. g. measurement from aload cell.

10 RAMP RATE=1 Selection in Fieldbus mode if RAMP RATE signal from superior controlleris not required by drive.

True

The RAMP RATE signal available from Fieldbus communication is notactive, set fixed to 1.0.

False

The RAMP RATE signal from Fieldbus communication (DS3.1) is active.



7.2.30 Group 70 Position measurementThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-29 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.



1 POS SCALE 1.00 ... 32767.00PPU

Position scaling

2 SYNC COND Pos; Neg Synchronisationcondition

1 POS SCALE Set position counter scaling factor, POS SCALE, as number of PulsesPer Unit, e.g. pulses/mm. (Position measurement value POSACT =Pulse counter / POS SCALE.)

Example how to calculate POS SCALE: Hoist operating speed 40 m/min(40.000 mm/min) corresponding to motor speed of 980 rpm. Pulseencoder with 1024 ppr (parameter 50.4). Speed measuring set to use all4 edges (parameter 50.2=default). This gives us POS SCALE =(980 * 1024 * 4) / 40.000 = 100.35 pulses/mm.

2 SYNC COND Pos

The HW synchronisation acts on positive edge (0 -> 1) of e.g. DI7

Neg

The HW synchronisation acts on negative edge (1 -> 0) of e.g. DI7



7.2.31 Group 71 Fieldbus CommThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-30 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.


Parameter Range/unit Description1 COMTEST FLT TD 0...32767 ms Communication fault

time delay4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE;

STD DRIVEAdvant controllercommunication type

1 COMTEST FLT TD If the Fieldbus communication toggle bit, being sent between the driveand supervisory controller and back, is not changing within the time setin COMTEST FLT TD the drive trips, indicating MAS OSC FLT.

4 ADVANT COMM TYPE Selection of Advant controller communication type if communicating viaAdvant controller Module bus port (AC70, AC80, AC410 with FCI orAC450 with FCI).

ENG DRIVE

"Engineered" type of Advant communication, corresponding to AdvantDatabase element DRIENG. Maximum 10 datasets/direction possible i.e.all DCC600 datasets (1 – 10) are accessable.

STD DRIVE

"Standard" type of Advant communication, corresponding to AdvantDatabase element DRISTD. Maximum 2 datasets/direction possible i.e.only DCC600 datasets 1 – 4 are accessable.



7.2.32 Group 72 Master/FollowerThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-31 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.


Parameter Range/unit Description1 MAST/FOLL MODE OFF; MASTER;

FOLLOWER(visible only if M/FCTRL macro selected)

Master/Followermode selection

2 TORQUE SELECTOR ZERO; SPEED;TORQUE; MINIMUM;MAXIMUM; ADD

Torque selectorsetting

3 LOAD SHARE 0.0 ... 400.0 % (visibleonly if M/F CTRLmacro selected)

Load sharing

4 WINDOW SEL ON OFF; ON Window ctrlselection on

5 WINDOW WIDTH POS 0.0 ...12000.0 rpm Window widthpositive

6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG -12000.0 rpm...0.0 rpm Window widthnegative

7 DROOP RATE 0.00 % ... 800.00 % Droop rate8 TORQ REF A FTC 0 ... 32767 ms (visible

only if M/F CTRLmacro selected)

Torque referenceA filter timeconstant

9 M/F FAULT TD 0 ... 32767 ms (visibleonly if M/F CTRLmacro selected)

Master/Followerfault time delay

10 M/F COMM ERR TD 0 ... 32767 ms (visibleonly if M/F CTRLmacro selected)

Master/Followercommunicationerror time delay

11 MF BROADCASTMODE

NO; YES Master/Followerbroadcast mode

1 MAST/FOLL MODE Master and follower drive operating mode.

OFF

Master or Follower drive not activated, only separate control (or Local)available.

MASTER

Drive selected to be the Master drive in M/F control.

FOLLOWER

Drive selected to be the Follower drive in M/F control.



2 TORQUE SELECTOR Mode selection for Follower drive.

ZERO

Torque selector parameter not active (speed or torque control selectiondone with I/O or Fieldbus in normal way).

SPEED

Drive is speed controlled. Receiving speed reference (before ramp!) fromMaster drive if M/F ctrl macro active i.e. using M/F bus comm.

TORQUE

Drive is torque controlled. Receiving torque reference from Master driveif M/F ctrl macro active (Torq ref A), i.e. load sharing between Masterand Follower.

MINIMUM

Torque selector compares the torque reference and the output of thespeed controller. The lower value is used as the reference for motortorque control. Receiving speed and torque references from Master driveif M/F ctrl macro active. This mode should normally not be used witha crane drive!

MAXIMUM

Torque selector compares the torque reference and the output of thespeed controller. The higher value is used as the reference for motortorque control. Receiving speed and torque references from Master driveif M/F ctrl macro active. This mode should normally not be used witha crane drive!

ADD

Torque selector adds the speed controller output to torque reference.The drive is torque controlled in normal operating range.

The selection ADD together with the window control form a speedsupervision function for a torque controlled Follower drive:

In normal operating range, the Follower follows the torque reference(TORQ REF A).

Window control keeps the speed controller input and output to zeroas long as the speed error (speed reference - actual speed) remainswithin a certain window

If the speed error goes out of the window, window control connectsthe increases or decreases the internal torque reference, stoppingthe rise or fall of the actual speed.



G = Speed controller gaine = Valueconnected to speedcontroller

Speed Reference

Torque Reference

Internal Torque Reference =Torque Reference + Speed Controller Output

Speed Controller Output

Actual Speed

72.6 WINDOWWIDTH NEG

72.5 WINDOWWIDTH POS

Window Control

e

G⋅e

Time

3 LOAD SHARE Follower drive setting adjusts the load split between Master andFollower. 100% setting causes the Follower drive to produce the samepercent of motor nominal torque as the Master drive, i.e. 50/50 load split.

4 WINDOW SEL ON Window control together with the selection of ADD of Parameter 72.2TORQUE SELECTOR form a speed supervision function for a torquecontrolled drive.

OFF

Window control is off.

ON

Window control is on. This selection should be used only whenParameter 72.2 TORQUE SELECTOR is set to ADD. Window controlsupervises the speed error value (Speed Reference - Actual Speed). Innormal operating range the window control keeps the speed controllerinput at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if:

the speed error exceeds the value of Parameter 72.5 WINDOWWIDTH POS or

the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value ofParameter 72.6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG.

When the speed error goes outside the window the exceeding part of theerror value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controllerproduces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speedcontroller (Parameter 23.1 KPS) which the torque selector adds to thetorque reference. The result is used as the internal torque reference forDCC 600.



For example, in a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of thedrive is decreased, preventing the excessive rise of motor speed. If thewindow control were inactivated, the motor speed would rise until aspeed limit of the DCC 600 was reached. Parameters 20.1 MINIMUMSPEED and 20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED set the speed limits.

5 WINDOW WIDTH POS This parameter value is considered only if the window control is on. Theallowed setting range is from 0 to 1500 rpm.

The speed controller input is kept to zero until the positive speed errorexceeds the value WINDOW WIDTH POS.

6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG This parameter value is considered only if the window control is on. Theallowed setting range is from 0 to 1500 rpm.

The speed controller input is kept to zero until the absolute value of thenegative speed error exceeds WINDOW WIDTH NEG.

7 DROOP RATE This parameter value needs to be changed only if both the Master andthe Follower are speed controlled.

CAUTION ! Follower speed control or drooping should not be used if themotor shafts of the Master and the Follower are solidly coupled together(e.g. gearbox or common rail).

Drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increasesin order to provide better load sharing between the Master and Followerdrives. The correct droop rate for each installation needs to bedetermined case by case. If drooping is used it is recommended to setsome droop rate both for the Follower and Master drives.

The droop rate is set as % of the drive maximum speed. The actualspeed decrease in a certain operating point depends on the droop ratesetting and the internal torque reference of the drive (speed controlleroutput).

Speed Decrease =Drooping ⋅ Speed Controller Output ⋅ Max. Speed

Calculation Example:DROOP RATE is 1%. Speed Controller Output is 50% andmaximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm.Speed decrease = 0.01 ⋅ 0.50 ⋅ 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm

MotorSpeed

(%)

Speed ControllerOutput (%)

100%

Drooping

No Drooping

Par. 72.7 DROOP RATE

At 100 % speed controller output, drooping is at its maximum level i.e.equal to the value of the DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreaseslinearly to zero along with the decreasing load.



8 TORQ REF A FTC Filtering time constant for torque reference TORQ REF A in Followerdrive, received from Master drive.

9 M/F FAULT TD When the Follower drive have received start-order from Master drive,both drives check that they have signal RUNNING=1 within the time M/FFAULT TD. If not the drive will trip, indicating MF RUN FLT. NOTE:Master drive will trip as a result of a Follower drive tripping

10 M/F COMM ERR TD As soon as the Master and the Follower are activated (Parameter 72.1MAST/FOLL MODE), they start to monitor a bus communication togglebit that is sent between the two drives. If the toggle bit stops longer thanthe time M/F COMM ERR TD the drive trips, indicating MF COMM ERR.NOTE: This delay for MF COMM ERR is not active if usingMaster/Follower Broadcast mode.

11 MF BROADCAST MODE Enable Master/Follower broadcast mode if multiple Follower drives arerequired. Set = YES in both broadcast Master and Followers. Ifbroadcast mode is selected, Master drive will send only Speed andTorque reference to all drives set as Followers (par. 72.1). Master andFollowers to have channel 2 connected together in a closed optical ring.On and Start orders must be connected via I/O or Fieldbus (Standaloneor Fieldbus mode used, par. 64.1) directly to each drive in Master as wellas Followers. Also monitoring of e.g. Running signal from all drives mustbe done externally.

NO

Master/Follower Broadcast mode disabled. Normal point-to-pointMaster/Follower communication with only one Follower is possible.

YES

Master/Follower Broadcast mode is enabled.



7.2.33 Group 80 Shared motionThis group is not visible when parameter 16.6=OFF. The Range/Unitcolumn in Table 7-32 shows the allowable parameter values. The textfollowing the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 7-32 Group 80


1 BRAKE ACKN SEL 2 NOT USED; DI2;DI6; DI7; DI8

Brake acknowledge digitalinput, motor 2

2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKELIFT

Refer to text below

3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKELIFT

Refer to text below

4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 0.5 … 325.0% Maximum positive outputtorque, motor 2

5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 -325.0…-1.0% Minimum negative outputtorque, motor 2

6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 0.0 … 400.0% Current limit for motor bridge,motor 2

7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 -400.0 … 400.0% Current limit for generatorbridge, motor 2

8 KPS 2 0.0 … 325.0 Relative gain of the speedcontroller, motor 2

9 TIS 2 0 … 32767 ms Integral active time of thespeed controller, motor 2

10 ARM L 2 0.0 … 32767.0 Armature inductance, motor 211 ARM R 2 0.0 … 32767.0 Armature inductance, motor 212 INT EMF REF 2 10.0 … 146.0 % Nominal EMF value, motor 213 ARM CUR PO PGAIN2 3.0 … 2997.0 P-gain of PI current controller,

motor 214 ARM CUR PI IGAIN2 0.0 … 31968.0 Integral time constant of PI

current controller, motor 215 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 0.0 … 100.0% Current level between

discontinuous and continuouscurrent, motor 2

16 SPEED FB SEL 2 Refer to text below Speed feedback selection,motor 2

17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 0.0 … 100.0 % Zero speed level, motor 218 SP DEV LEV 2 0 … 100% Speed deviation level, motor 219 TORQ FLT TD 2 0 … 60000ms Torque fault time delay, motor

220 SP DER BLK LEV 2 0 … 100% /s Speed derivative blocking

level, motor 221 TORQ PROV SEL 2 True; False Torque proving select, motor

222 POWOP SELECT 2 True; False Power optimisation select,

motor 223 BASE SPEED 2 1.0 … 100.0% Base speed, motor 224 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 0 … 5000 rpm Maximum speed, motor 225 ACC TIME FORW 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Acceleration time forward,

motor 226 ACC TIME REV 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Acceleration time reverse,

motor 2




27 DEC TIME FORW 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Deceleration time forward,motor 2

28 DEC TIME REV 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Deceleration time reverse,motor 2

29 SPEED REF TD 2 0.05 … 10.00s Speed reference time delay,motor 2

30 START TORQ SEL 2 NOT USED; AUTOTQ MEM; LOADMEAS

Start torque select, motor 2

31 POS SCALE 2 1.00 …32767.00PPU

Position scaling, motor 2

32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 5.0 … 1800.0 V Nominal voltage from themotor rating plate, motor 2

33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 0.0 …10000.0A Matches the DCC600 to therated motor current, motor 2

34 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2 20.0 … 7500.0 rpm Nominal speed from the motorrating plate, motor 2

35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD 0.0 … 5.0 S Motor 1 or motor 2parameters ready time delay

1 BRAKE ACKN SEL 2 Selection of digital input for brake acknowledge, when motor 2.NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8

2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 This parameter allows you to select which information is indicated withdigital output 4, when motor 2.

NOT USED

BRAKE LIFT

Signal for control of the mechanical br5ake on motor 2.

3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 Refer to parameter 80.2 (=DO4 OUTPUT 2).

4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 Maximum positive output torque for motor 2, in per cent of the nominalmotor torque. The output torque of the torque selector (including loadcompensation and torque step) is limited against this value.

5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 Minimum negative output torque for motor 2, in per cent of the nominalmotor torque. The output torque of the torque selector (including loadcompensation and torque step) is limited against this value.

6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 Current limit for the motor bridge, related to the nominal current ofmotor 2.

7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 Current limit for the generator bridge, related to the nominal current ofmotor 2.NOTE! This limit is low-limited to ∅, if single quadrant type converter.

8 KPS 2 Relative gain of the speed controller, for motor 2.

9 TIS 2 Integral active time of the speed controller, for motor 2.



10 ARM L 2 Relative inductance of the armature circuit of motor 2. (For moreinformation, see par. 41.11).

11 ARM R 2 Relative resistance of the armature circuit of motor 2. (For moreinformation, see par. 41.12).

12 INT EMF REF 2 Nominal EMF value for motor 2. Used as local EMF reference. (For moreinformation, see par. 41.19).

13 ARM CUR PI PGAIN 2 P-gain of PI current controller, motor 2.

14 ARM CUR PI IGAIN 2 Integral time constant of PI current controller, motor 2.

15 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 Current level between discontinuous and continuous current, motor 2.

16 SPEED FB SEL 2 Speed feedback selection for motor 2:

CALC BY EMF calculated by EMF

CON-ENCODER measured by encoder connected to SDCS.CON-2

NTAC MODULE measured by encoder, connected to a PulseEncoder Interface Module, type NTAC.NOTE: Not supported in DCC600

ANALOG TAC analogue tacho connected to AITAC input

17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 Parameter for setting the speed level for ZERO SPEED indication,motor 2.

18 SP DEV LEV 2 A level above this parameter means that the speed error is too high,motor 2.

19 TORQ FLT TD 2 If a speed error higher than SP DEV LEV 2 occurs for motor 2, and if itlasts longer than the time TORQ FLT TD 2, the drive will trip, indicatingTORQ FLT.

20 SP DER BLK LEV 2 The torque fault protection is blocked during acceleration anddeceleration on motor 2, if the sign of the speed error is OK, and if thederivative of the actual speed is higher than the setting of this parameter.

21 TORQ PROV SEL 2 True

Torque proving is active on motor 2 (pulse encoder is required).

False

Torque proving is not active on motor 2.

22 POWOP SELECT 2 True

Power optimisation is active on motor 2.

False

Power optimisation is not active on motor 2.



23 BASE SPEED 2 Normally the speed where field weakening starts, and the available RMSpower of the motor is constant, motor 2.

24 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 Setting of motor 2 maximum shaft rotational speed (rpm), correspondingto 100 % speed reference.

25 ACC TIME FORW 2 Setting of acceleration ramp time forward direction (up), for motor 2, 0 to+ 100% speed (where 100% corresponds to parameter 80.24).

26 ACC TIME REV 2 Setting of acceleration ramp time reverse direction (down), for motor 2, 0to + 100% speed (ref. parameter 80.24).

27 DEC TIME FORW 2 Setting of deceleration ramp time forward direction for motor 2, + 100 to 0% speed (ref. parameter 80.24).

28 DEC TIME REV 2 Setting of decleration ramp time reverse direction for motor 2, -100 to 0 %speed (ref. parameter 80.24).

29 SPEED REF TD 2 Time delay before connecting speed reference to ramp unit, motor 2.

30 START TORQ SEL 2 Start torque selection for motor 2:

NOT USED: No extra starting torque.

AUTO TQ MEM: Automatic torque memory selected.

LOAD MEAS: Starting torque reference is received from ansuperior controller e.g. measurement from a loadcell.

31 POS SCALE 2 Set position counter scaling factor for motor 2, POS SCALE 2, as numberof Pulses Per Unit, e.g. pulses/mm. (For more information, see par. 70.1).

32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 This parameter matches the DCC 600 with the nominal armature voltageof motor 2, as indicated on the motor rating plate.

33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 This parameter matches the DCC 600 to the rated armature current ofmotor 2.

35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD Time delay before giving signal “parameters ready” (User 1 or 2) after aswitch-over between motor 1 and motor 2.



7.2.34 Group 92 Dataset TR AddrThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-33 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 7-33 Group 92

Parameter Range/Unit Description1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 0 … 9999 Address of Dataset 4 Word 12 DATASET 4 WORD 2 0 … 9999 Address of Dataset 4 Word 23 DATASET 4 WORD 3 0 … 9999 Address of Dataset 4 Word 3

Group 92 is used as a signal "switchbox" to connect signals from Groups1. 2 or 3 to Fieldbus dataset 4 words 1 - 3.

1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 Address selection, Group and Index, for Fieldbus dataset 4 word 1.Example: To connect signal SPEED REF3 for transmission in Dataset 4Word 1, set parameter 92.1 = 202 . That is 202 = Group 2, Index 02.

2 DATASET 4 WORD 2 Refer to Parameter 92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1

3 DATASET 4 WORD 3 Refer to Parameter 92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1



7.2.35 Group 98 Option modulesThe Range/Unit column in Table 7-34 shows the allowable parametervalues. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 7-34 Group 98

Parameter Range/Unit Description2 COMM MODULE NO;

FIELDBUS;ADVANT

Communication optionmodule selection.

3 CH3 NODE ADDR 1 ... 125 Channel 3 node address4 CH0 NODE ADDR 1 … 125 Channel 0 node address8 IO BOARD CONFIG NO I/O BOARD;

IOB2; IOB3;IOB2+3; IOE;IOE+IOB2;IOE+IOB3;IOE+IOB2+3

IO board selection.

The parameters for the option module group are set if an option moduleis installed. For more information on option module parameters refer tothe option module manuals.

2 COMM MODULE Set to FIELDBUS if communication option module, e.g. NMBA-01 isconnected to channel 0 of DCC 600. Parameters in group 51 must be setbefore operation.Set to ADVANT if optical “Module bus” of ADVANT controllers AC70,AC80, AC410 (CI810), AC450 (CI810), or if AC80 "Drivebus" isconnected to channel 0 of DCC 600.

3 CH3 NODE ADDR Set a different node address for DDCS channel 3 in each drive, ifconnecting multiple drives together to Drives Window PC-toolcommunication (ring or star connection).

4 CH 0 NODE ADDR Set node address for AMC-DC channel 0 if connected to Advantcontroller optical Module bus or AC80 Drivebus (98.2 = ADVANT).The ch 0 node address is set according to the Module bus POSITIONvalue used for this drive, by using the following conversion:If POSITION = yzw than calculate drive ch 0 node address 98.4 asy*16+zw.Example: If POSITION = 101 than Par 98.4 = 1*16+01 = 17101 → 17, 102 → 18, … 112 → 28201 → 33, 202 → 34, … 212 → 44:701 → 113, 702 → 114, … 712 → 124

If using AC80 Drivebus, ch 0 node address is set equal to Drive Numbersetting on ACSRX function block in AC80.



8 IO BOARD CONFIG This parameter selects the IO boards connected to the SDCS-CON2board. The SDCS-IOB2 and SDCS-IOB3 boards do not extend theamount of available I/O resources, but change their electrical behaviour.

NO I/O BOARD

IOB2

IOB3

IOB2+3 SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3

The SDCS-IOE board extends the amount of available I/O resources(+7 DI).

IOE SDCS-IOE

IOE+IOB2 SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB2

IOE+IOB3 SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB3

IOE+IOB2+3 SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3

This parameter enables the supervision of the selected I/O boards. Theconfiguration of the available I/O resources is done by means ofparameters inside the I/O-SETTINGS groups 10-14.

7.2.36 Group 99 Start-up DataSee Chapter 3 Start-up Data for information on these parameters.


8 Chapter 8 - Fau lt Tracing and Maintenance

8.1 OverviewThe DCC 600 is equipped with advanced protection features thatcontinuously guard the unit against damage and down time due toincorrect operating conditions and electrical and mechanicalmalfunctions. This chapter explains the DCC 600 fault tracing procedurewith the CDP 312 Control Panel and 7 segment display on CON-2 board.

All Warning and Fault messages (including the ones from user definableProgrammable Fault Functions) are presented in this chapter, withinformation on the cause and remedy for each case. Fault and Warningindications are displayed in the Actual Signal Display Mode as well as inthe Parameter Mode. Warnings do not have a direct effect on operation.Faults terminate motor operation.

The standard maintenance measures are described in the latter part ofthis chapter.

Most Warning and Fault conditions can be identified and cured with theinformation in this manual. There are, however, some situations that canonly be treated by an ABB service representative. The unit is fitted withcomplex circuitry, and measurements, parts replacements and serviceprocedures not described in this manual are not allowed for the user.

DCS600 MultiDrive has versatile diagnostic functions in order to monitorHW-functions and to facilitate trouble-shooting. Functions are:

• Thyristor diagnosis• Control board self diagnosis• Supply voltage monitoring• Watchdog• Fault logger• Data logger

Diagnostic information are divided into 2 main classes. These are:

ALARM An announcement that some limit is reached. Alarm does notprevent the drive to run.

FAULT The drive is always tripped.

Faults and alarms have a 12 character long text for the fault logger. Thetext language is English. Faults and alarms detected by the convertercontrol software (inside SDCS-CON-2) have also a numerical code fordisplay at the SDCS-CON-2 board’s 7-segment display. Codes between0 and 99 are reserved for faults. Code numbers bigger than 100 arereserved for alarms (however, the alarm message written to the faultlogger displays only the 2 least significant digits).

Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance


CAUTION! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or otherservice procedure not described in this manual. Such action will voidguarantee, endanger correct operation, and increase downtime andexpense.

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work describedin this Chapter 8– Fault Tracing and Maintenance should only beundertaken by a qualified electrician. Disconnect mains power if faulttracing involves work inside the frame, the motor or the motor cable.The DCC 600 can contain dangerous voltages from external controlcircuits. Exercise appropriate care when working on the unit.Neglecting these instructions can cause physical injury and death.

WARNING! The printed circuit boards contain integrated circuits thatare extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Exerciseappropriate care when working on the unit to avoid permanentdamage to the circuits.



8.2 Display of status, alarm and fault signals

Categories of signals andpossibilities of display

The signals (messages) to be available for thyristor power con-verters series DCS 600 are subdividedinto four (fifth categorysee below) categories:

General messages

Starting errors

F Fault signals

A Alarm signals

A seven segment display on the control board SDCS-CON-2 of thethyristor power converters seriesDCS 600 is used to show generalmessages, starting errors, fault andalarm signals.The signals (messages) are displayedas codes. If the codes consist ofseveral parts, the characters/individualdigits will be indicated for 0.7 sec oneafter the other, e.g.:

0.7s 0.7s0.7s

⇒ ⇒ F 14 = Speed measurement fault⇑ ⇐ ⇓

In addition to this the DCS 600 combined with the LCD of thecontrol panel CDP 312 will be able toshow the fault and alarmsignals as numbers with text as well asthe status signals(selected in Actual Signal DisplayMode [⇒ ACT-key] by signalgroup 1..xx ... 6.xx).

For subsequent evaluation via binary outputs or serial interfacesthe 16 bit informations FAULT WORD1[3.02], FAULT WORD2 [3.03], FAULTWORD3 [3.04] and FAULT WORD4[3.05] as well as ALARM WORD1 [3.06]and ALARM WORD2 [3.07] containseveral fault and alarm signals asa binary code.



8.3 General messages

From SDCS-CON-2 board

The general messages will only be shown on the seven segmentdisplay/LEDs of the boards SDCS-CON-2/SDCS-AMC-DC.

Codesevensegm.display

Text onLCD of control panel

CDP 312(or DRIVES WINDOW)

Definition - Remark

8 Not available Program is not running [SDCS-CON-2] –

. Not available Normal situation, no fault / no alarm signal –

L Not available Indication while loading another firmware

into the control board SDCS-CON-2

–

From SDCS-AMC-DC board

Definition Remark

green Software running SDCS-AMC-DC Software under operation

red Fault Fault occured; Fault and Alarm Words ⇒ group 3

8.4 Starting errors (E) [from SDCS-CON-2 board]

The starting errors will only be shown on the seven segment display ofthe control board SDCS-CON-2. With starting errors it will not be possibleto start the drive.




Definition - Remark

E1 Not available ROM memory test error [SDCS-CON-2] –

E2 Not available RAM memory test error [SDCS-CON-2] –

E5 Not available No control program in memory [SDCS-CON-2] –

E6 Not available Hardware is not compatible [SDCS-CON-2] –

(1) Units should be switched off and on electrically; if fault occurs again, the PCBs SDCS-POW-1 and SDCS-CON-2have to be checked and if necessary to be changed.

(2) Load firmware once more.



8.5 Fault Signals (F)

The fault signals will be shown on the seven segment display ofthe control board SDCS-CON-2 as codes F . . as well as on theLCD of the control panel CDP 312 as numbers with text.Moreover there are fault signals which will only be shown on theLCD of the control panel.All fault signals - with the exception of F 17, F 18 and F 20 - canbe reset (after elimination of the faults).For resetting (RESET) of fault signals the following steps arerequired:• Switching off the commands ON/OFF and RUN

• Elimination of the faults

• Fault acknowledgement, i.e. resetting (RESET) through inputof the command RESET with APC or in ”LOCAL” mode withcontrol panel CDP 312/DRIVES WINDOW.

• Depending on the application conditions generate the com-mands ON/OFF and RUN once more.

The fault signals will result in tripping the drive (installation-de-pendent).If a fault occurs, there will be three different possibilities of reaction(see column ”Remark” in the fault list):(1) Fault will switch off the signals energizing the main contactor, the

field contactor and the fan contactor.(2) Fault will switch off the signals energizing the main contactor and

the field contactor.(3) Fault will switch off the signal energizing the main contactor.




Definition /Action

StatusSignal

(FAULT_WORD_1/2/3/4)

Remark

F 1 01 AUX UVOLT Auxiliary voltage faultThe auxiliary voltage (230 V) is too low whilethe drive is in operation. If resetting fails,check internal auxiliary voltages. If faultpersists, change SDCS-CON-2 and/ orSDCS-POW 1 board (if required).

3.03 bit 0 (1)

F 2 02 OVERCURR OvercurrentCheck: - Motor, load and armature cabling

for faults or blocking condition;- Parameter setting of current con-

trol circuit/torque limitation;- Parameter [P 42.05]

(overcurrent detection).- Faulty thyristor

3.03 bit 1 (3)

F 4 04 CONV TEMP Overtemperature power sectionCheck: - Fan supply, direction of rotation,

fan components, air inlet andambient temperature;-Inadmissible load cycle?-connector X12 on SDCS-CON-2

3.03 bit 3 (2)






Definition /Action

StatusSignal


Remark

F 5 05 EARTH FLT Earth fault (Σ IL1,IL2,IL3 differs from zero)Disconnect the mains and verify zero voltagein armature and field circuits.Make insulation test for the completeinstallation.Check sum current transformer; if necessary,change transformer and SDCS-IOB-3 board.

3.03 bit 4 (1)

F 6 06 MOT1 TEMP Overtemperature of MOTOR 1Check: - Temperature sensor and its

cabling;-Motor cooling or sizing;-Inputs for temperature sensoron board SDCS-IOB-3;-Param. setting [P 28.11] correct?

3.03 bit 5 (2)

F 7 07 MOT1 LOAD Overload of motor 1 (Thermal model 1)Check: - Motor temperature (let motor cool

down and restart);-Motor ratings and parameters ofthermal model;-Motor sizing or load cycle;-Param. setting [P 28.04] correct?

3.03 bit 6 (2)

F 14 14 SPD MEAS Speed feedback (measurement) faultCheck: - Incremental encoder and connec-

tion cable, encoder power supply(feedback might be too low);-Tacho polarity and voltage(does a total mismatch exist?)-Position of jumper S4 on boardSDCS-CON-2 O.K.?-Electronic boards SDCS-CON-2,SDCS-IOB-3, SDCS-POW 1;-Connection converter – armaturecircuit open?-Correct setting for selection ofspeed feedback monitoring?

3.04 bit 5 (3)

F 17 17 TYPE CODE (Converter) Type coding faultSDCS-PIN-xx board not connected to boardSDCS-CON-2 or SDCS-PIN-xx not coded.Check: - Flat cables X12 and X13 O.K.?

-Faulty coding on SDCS-PIN-xx?-New boards SDCS-CON-2/SDCS-AMC-DC installed?-Correct coding of unit size C4?

3.04 bit 8 (1)Can

not bereset






Definition /Action

StatusSignal


Remark

F 18 18 CON FLASH Memory fault on SDCS-CON-2 board(Parameter saving fault)Cause: Wrong or missing checksum, dataerror while writing or reading.Note: Try again saving of type coding; for that purpose

-Move jumper S2 (on board SDCS-CON-2) to Pos.1–2with electronics supply switched OFF;-Switch ON electronics again;-Select [P 15.02] = 22;-Wait until 15.02 = 0 again;-Switch OFF electronics;-Reset jumper S2 to ist original position;-Switch ON electronics again.

If display shows F 18 once again, change SDCS-CON-2board!

3.05 bit 14 (1)Can

not bereset

F 20 20 CON-SYSTEMFAULT

CON-SYSTEM FAULTThis fault is shown after downloading thesoftware of the SDCS-AMC-DC board.The auxiliary voltage (230 V) has to beswitched OFF and ON again.

3.05 bit 15 (1)Can

not bereset

F 27 27 MOT2 LOAD Overload of MOTOR 2 (Thermal model 2).see Fault Code F 7

3.03 bit 9 (2)

F 28 28 ARM OVOLT Armature (DC circuit) overvoltageCheck: - Setting of param. [P 28.22] suitable

for the system configuration?-Setting of field current and actualvalue as well as the completefield supply (FIELD EXCITER);-Was the motor accelerated by

the load?-Speed scaling [P 69.01];-Armature voltage feedback;-Connections between SDCS-CON-2 and SDCS-PIN boards;-Coding of voltage evaluation onSDCS-PIN-xx board.

3.03 bit 2 (1)

F 29 29 MAIN UVLT Mains supply undervoltage (AC); setting viaparameters [P 40.01] or/ and [P 40.02]Check: - Is the mains voltage within the

admissible tolerance?-Did the mains contactor closeand open?-Voltage scaling via parameter[P 42.06] rated line voltagecorrect?-Connections between SDCS-CON-2 and SDCS-PIN-xx boards;-Coding of voltage measurementon SDCS-PIN-xx board.

3.03 bit 11 (3)

F 30 30 MAIN OVLT Mains supply overvoltage (AC)Mains voltage > 130% of nominal value(parameter [P 42.06]) for longer than 10s.Fault tracing see Fault Code F 29.

3.03 bit 12 (1)






Definition /Action

StatusSignal


Remark

F 31 31 NO SYNC Synchronization fault (of mains)Check: - Mains supply, fuses etc.;

-Mains voltage and stability.

3.03 bit 13 (3)

F 32 32 FEX1 OCUR FIELD EXCITER 1 (field supply 1) overcurrentCheck: - FIELD1_OVERCUR_LEV

(parameter [P 20.16]);-Connections of field exciter aswell as insulation level of cableand of field winding.

3.03 bit 14 (1)

F 33 33 FEX1 COMM FIELD EXCITER 1 communication errorCheck: - Flat cable connections X14: or

cable X16: BETWEEN SDCS-CON-2 board and field exciter;-Auxil. voltage for ext. field exciter.

3.03 bit 15 (1)

F 34 34 CURR RIPP Armature current rippleOne or several thyristors carry no CURRENT.Check: - Current feedback withoscilloscope (6PULSES within one cycle visible?);

-Branch fuses, thyristor gate con-nection and gate-cathode resis-

tance;-See also parameters [P 43.10],[P 43.11], and [P 43.12]

3.04 bit 0 (3)

F 35 35 FEX2 OCUR FIELD EXCITER 2 (field supply 2) overcurrentCHECK: -FIELD2_OVERCUR_LEV

(parameter [P 20.17]);-Connections of field exciter aswell as insulation level of cableand of field winding.

3.04 bit 1 (1)

F 36 36 FEX2 COMM FIELD EXCITER 2 communication errorSEE Fault Code F 33

3.04 bit 2 (1)

F 38 38 PHAS SEQU Phase sequence fault of power sectionChange supply phase sequency or makecorrection with parameter [P 42.01].Attention: Direction of rotation of 3-phase

fan correct?

3.04 bit 3 (3)

F 39 39 NO FIELD No field acknowledge from FIELD EXCITERCheck: - Do selection PARAMETERS match

the field exciter (field supply)?-Field exciter supply, cable and

field winding;-Status/level of acknowledge signal.

3.04 bit 4 (1)

F 40 40 NO E FAN No acknowledge from FAN of motorCheck: - Contactor circuit/supply for fan of

motor;-Status of binary inputs/outputs(DI2/DO1) on SDCS-IOB-2/SDCS-CON-2 boards;-Parameter setting [P 15.07].

3.04 bit 6 (1)






Definition /Action

StatusSignal


Remark

F 41 41 NO M CONT Missing main contactor acknowledgeCheck: - SWITCH-ON/-OFF sequence

correct?-Status of binary input DI3 for ac-knowledge signal ACK_M_CONTof main contactor;-Status of binary output DO3 resp.of auxiliary contactor (relay)closing the main contactor afterON/OFF command.

3.04 bit 7 (3)

F 42 42 FEX1 FLT FIELD EXCITER 1 (field supply 1) faultA fault was found during self-diagnosis offield exciter.Check: - Field exciter operation;

change the unit, if necessary;-Field 1/Field 2 coding O.K.?

3.04 bit 12 (1)

F 43 43 FEX2 FLT FIELD EXCITER 2 (field supply 2) faultSee Fault Code F 42

3.04 bit 13

F 44 44 NO I/O Missing input/output (I/O-) boardCheck: - Correct selection of SDCS-IOB-2/3

and IOE-1 boards (see alsoparameter [P 98.08])- Is +/- 10 V supply available?- Flat cable connections betweenSDCS-CON-2 and SDCS-IOB-2/3or IOE-1 boards.

3.03 bit 7 (1)

F 48 48 MOT2 TEMP Overtemperature of MOTOR 2Check: - Parameter setting [P 28.14]

correct?See Fault Code F 6

3.03 bit 8

F 50 50 NO C FAN No CONVERTER FAN supply acknowledgeDepending on type of unit (size):Size C4 ⇒ Fault signal F 50Sizes C1...C3 ⇒ Alarm signal A 126

Check: - Was input for acknowledgesignal DI1 used?

3.04 bit 10 (2)

F 65 65 REVER FLT Zero current signal not reached within 6.6 msVery fast current rise ramp:

- increase parameter REV GAP [P 43.15]

3.05 bit 0 (3)

*) RESET FAULT RESET of all faults which can beacknowledged

*) SYSTEM FAULT Fault of the SDCS-AMC-DC boardFault of the operating system.

3.05 bit 7

*) CON COMMUNIC Communication fault between the SDCS-AMC-DC board and the SDCS-CON-2 board

3.05 bit 10 Cannot bereset

*) CH0 COMMUN Communication fault with fieldbus,APC or fieldbus adaptersCheck: -Optical fibre cable connections;

-APC, PLC and adapters readyfor operation?






Definition /Action

StatusSignal


Remark

*) M/F LINK Communication fault in the Master-Follower-link

Check: - Optical fibre cable connections.

3.05 bit 11

*) PANEL LOSS Connection fault to the Control PanelCDP 312 or DRIVES WINDOWCheck: - Control Panel CDP 312 discon-

nected?-Connection adapter or cabledamaged?-Communication problems usingthe program DRIVES WINDOW in”LOCAL” mode?

3.05 bit 13

*) SW MISMATCH Software versions loaded to SDCS-CON-2 andSDCS-AMC-DC do not match

3.05 bit 9

*) MOT OVERSP If the speed exceeds the level determined byMOT OVERSPEED LEV (61.2) then the drive istripped momentarily.Check: Torque and Current limit settings

Motor and motor cablesPulse encoder connections (A and B)

3.02 bit 0 (1)

*) TORQ FLT If SPEED ERROR during constant speed ishigher than SP DEV LEV (62.2) for time longerthan TORQ FLT TD (62.3) the drive will trip forTORQ.FLT.Check: Ramp times

Torque and Current limit settingsTorque monitoring (Group 62) parametersettingsMotor and motor cablesPulse encoder connections (A and B)

3.02 bit 0 (1)

*) TORQ PR FLT If torque proving is not successful, thatmeans torque does not reach the test levelwithin the time TORQ PROV FLT TD (66.2), thedrive will trip. (Normally only used if activeload, e.g. hoist drive, with pulse encoderfeedback.Check: Motor and motor cables

Torque proving parameters Group 66

3.02 bit 4 (1)

*) BRAKE FLT A brake fault = missing acknowledgement(during brake release or at normal running)longer than time delay BRAKE FLT TD(Parameter 67.2) will trip the drive.Check: Brake contactor operation

Wiring of digital output Brake Lift (DO4 =default) to contactorWiring of brake acknowledgement to digital input 6

3.02 bit 2 (1)

*) MAS OSC FLT If “next edge” of the communication test bit isnot received within a certain time COMTESTFLT TD (Parameter 71.1), the drive will trip.Check: Fieldbus adapter and its connection to

board SDCS-AMC-DC channel 0.PLC program connection of comm. testbit from input to output.Fieldbus wiring.

3.02 bit 5 (1)






Definition /Action

StatusSignal


Remark

*) MF COMM ERR Master/Follower bus communication notactive. Communication test bit not receivedwithin time M/F COMM ERR TD (Parameter72.10).Check: M/F bus connections and fibers between

the Master drive channel 2 and the Follower dirve channel 2.Setting of parameter 72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE: Should be set to “MASTER” in Master drive and set to “FOLLOWER” in Follower drive.

3.02 bit 9 (1)

*) MF RUN FLT Both Master and Follower drive receivingstart-order, but only one of the drives are in“Running” state.Check: Setting of parameter 72.9 M/F FAULT

TD.M/F bus connections and fibres

3.02 bit14

(1)

*) MASTER FLT Communication between drive and Fieldbusadapter module not working properly longerthan time delay COMM FLT TME-OUT(Parameter 30.13).If this signal has to be effective only asan alarm (warning) signal, the mode offunctioning can be changed by settingthe parameter MASTER_FAULT_FUNC[P 30.12] .Check: Fieldbus adapter and it’s connectionfibers to SDCS-AMC-DC channel 0.

3.02 bit15

(1)

*)No Fault Code available on seven segment display!



8.6 Alarm Signals (A)

The alarm signals will be shown on the seven segment display of thecontrol board SDCS-CON-2 as codes A . . . On the LCD of the controlpanel CDP 312 the alarm signals will be shown as numbers (without theleading digit ”1”) with text.

sevensegm.

Display

Text on LCD ofcontrol panel


Definition /Possible source

Signalnumber

(ALARM_WORD_1/2)

Remark

A 101 01 START INH Alarm: Start InhibitionCheck: - Wiring to Digital input 4 (=Electrical

disconnect).

3.06 bit 0 Self-reset-tingafterEN-

ABLE

A 102 02 EMER STOP Alarm: EMERGENCY STOPNOTE: Not used in DCC 600. DI5 should not

be connected.

3.06 bit 1

A 103 03 MOT1 TEMP Alarm: Overtemperature MOTOR 1Check: - Parameter setting [P 28.10]

correct?

3.06 bit 5

A 104 04 MOT1 LOAD Alarm: Overload MOTOR 1 (Thermal Model 1)Check: - Overload of motor

- Parameter setting [P 28.03]correct?

3.06 bit 6

A 105 05 CONV TEMP Alarm: Overtemperature Power SectionThis signal will already appear at approx.10 °C below the shutdown temperatureapplying for Fault Signal F 4 (see max.temperature [P 04.17]).Check: - See Fault Code F 4.

3.06 bit 3

A 118 18 MAIN UVLT Alarm: Mains Undervoltage (AC)Setting of undervoltage monitoring withParameter [P 40.01] or/and [P 40.02]Check: - See also Fault Code F 29.

3.06 bit 10

A 120 20 CURR DEV Alarm: Armature Current DeviationIf the current reference ARM_CUR_REFdeviates from the current feedbackby more than 20 % for more than 5 sec,(referenced to the rated current), this signalwill be shown.Check: - Ratio between mains supply

voltage and EMF

3.06 bit 13



sevensegm.

Display

Text on LCD ofcontrol panel



Signalnumber

(ALARM_WORD_1/2)

Remark

A 123 23 MOT2 TEMP Alarm: Overtemperature MOTOR 2Check: - Parameter setting [P 28.13]

correct?See also Fault Code F 6.

3.06 bit 8

A 124 24 MOT2 LOAD Alarm: Overload MOTOR 2 (Thermal Model 2)Check: - Overload of motor

- Parameter setting [P 28.07]correct?

3.06 bit 9

A 126 26 CONV FAN Alarm: No (Thyristor Power) Converter FANAcknowledgeCheck: - See Fault Code F 50.

3.06 bit 12

A 127 27 EXT FAN Alarm: No Acknowledge from External FAN(of Motor)Check: - Contactor circuit/supply for fan of

motor;- Status of binary inputs/outputs

(DI2/DO1) on SDCS-IOB-2/SDCS-CON-2 boards;

- Parameter setting [P 15.07].

3.06 bit 15

A 129 29 TYPE CODE Alarm: Type Code (Hardware Code ofThyristor Power Converter) changedUnit type code stored in memory differs fromthe hardware coding.Check: - New control board SDCS-

CON-2 installed?- Control board SDCS-CON-2 /

SDCS-PIN-xx board inter-changed?

Action: - Save values in non-volatilememory using parameter DRIVE-MODE [P 15.02] = 22.

3.07 bit 1

A 132 32 AUX UVOLT Auxiliary voltage alarmThe auxiliary voltage (230 V) is too low whilethe drive is not in operation.For more details see Fault Code F 1.

3.07 bit 2



Alarm Signals referring to the SDCS-AMC-DC board

Code sevensegm.display




Signalnumber

(ALARM_WORD_1/2)

Remark

**) PANEL LOSS Alarm: Connection fault to the Control PanelCDP 312 / DRIVES WINDOWCheck: - Control Panel CDP 312 discon-

nected?- Connection adapter or cable

damaged?

3.07 bit 13

**) BRAKE L FT Brake Falling time at stop longer than timedelay BRAKE LONG FT TD (Parameter 67.5)gives a warning signal that will not trip thedrive but activate Watchdog output signal, tobe used for Emergency stop of crane.Check: Brake contactor.

Wiring of brake acknowledgement to digital input 6.

3.01 bit 13

**) JOYSTICK The drive is stopped and prevented fromstart. If Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) isTrue and control Type (Par 64.10 is JOYSTICKConditions:-START DIR A= “12” and START DIR B=”1”simultaneously–SPEED REF is > 1 V or TORQUE REF is >1Vand ZERO POS =”1”Check: Joystick and wiring to digital imputs 2,7,8

and analogue inputs 1 or 2.Setting of parameter 64.1 (Stand Alone Sel) if using fieldbus control

3.07 bit 6

**) SPEED SCALE Speed scaling out of range, see parameter[P 69.01].

3.07 bit 7release15.609or later

**) MOT CH BLOCK Shared motion motor change blocked.Supervision active if par. 16.6 (Shared motionsel) is activated and par. 16.5 (User macro chsrce) = Not sel and Rdy_run = 1Check: That Running signal = 0 and

That "Zero speed" indication signal = 1

3.07 bit 8

**)No Alarm Code available on seven segment display!



8.7 Thyristor DiagnosisThe thyristor diagnosis function is activated by the following steps:

• Open the main contactor e.g. by giving STOP command and OFFcommand in local mode.

• Set the DRIVE MODE (15.02) to 13.• Close the main contactor after max. 10 sec e.g. by giving ON

command and START command in local mode.• Now the thyristor diagnosis is running:

Short pulses bridge 1, alpha = 175 deg for the detection of non-blocking thyristors: The peaks of six current bubbles are recorded. If onepeak value is greater than 0.26 percent of the converter nominal current,at least one thyristor is not blocking.

Long pulses bridge 1, alpha = 150 deg for the detection of non-conducting thyristors: The mean values of six current bubbles arerecorded. A Thyristor is recognized as non-conducting, if its currentbubble mean value is below the largest of the bubbles minus three timesCUR RIPPLE LIM 1 (43.11).

The same with bridge 2.

If a fault in the powerstage is recognized, then all pulses are suspended, andthe electronics must be switched off. If no fault is detected, the drive startsrunning.

When the thyristor diagnosis is completed, DRIVE MODE (15.02) is reset to 0(success), or set to -1 (faulted powerstage).

The result of the thyristor diagnosis can be read from COMMISS STATUS (6.02): 0 no faults, diagnosis successfully completed10 no controller release within 10 sec11 at least one thyristor is not blocking12 more than one thyristor of bridge 1 is not firing13 more than one thyristor of bridge 2 is not firing14+i thyristor i (0...5) of bridge 1 is not firing20+i thyristor i (0...5) of bridge 2 is not firing

8.8 Supply Voltage MonitoringThe control board SDCS-CON-2 monitors the following voltage levels:

Supply voltage Under voltage limit+5 V +4.55 V+15 V +12.4 V-15 V - 12.0 V+24 V +19 V+48 V1 +38 V

If +5 V drops below the tripping limit, it causes a master reset byhardware causing a power fail message to be displayed. The firing pulsesare suppressed.



8.9 Watchdog FunctionThe control board SDCS-CON-2 contains an internal watchdog. Thewatchdog supervises program running on the control board. If watchdogtrips the HW takes care of the next functions:

• FPROM programming voltage is forced low.• Thyristor firing control is reset and disabled.• Digital outputs are forced low• Programmable analogue outputs are reset to zero, 0V.

8.10 Jumpers on the SCDS-CON-2 boardThe jumper S2 on the SDCS-CON-2 board allows to disable the readingof parameters out of the FPROM D35. However, the storage ofparameters (except type code signals 4.04, 4.05, 4.14 ... 4.17) ismaintained by the drive control board AMC-DC. Thus, there is no need tochange the setting of the jumper 2 at DCS600 MultiDrive (There is noeffect on the parameter handling). The DCS600 MultiDrive’s softwaredoesn’t utilize the parameter FPROM of SDCD-CON-2.

Jumpers must not be removed or connected if power is on!

8.11 Fault and Event LoggerThe fault logger collects 24 of the most recent faults into the fault bufferin the RAM memory. The faults are stored into the FLASH-memory of thedrive control board AMC-DC on the beginning of an auxiliary power loss.The fault logger consists of all the available information from the driveincluding faults, alarms, reset and system messages.

AMC Time Format and Counting

Time for the loggered fault is taken from the time of a usage counterwhich format is 9999 hours, xx min, yy.yyyy s. However the time can beupdated cyclically from the overriding system, if the system includes anoverriding controller (for example APC2). Drives Window tool and CDP312 Control Panel show this time in real date and time format.

8.12 Data LoggerThe purpose of the Datalogger is to collect the history of signals relatedto an incident and stored in the drive for later retrieval and analysis. Thecontent of the Datalogger is stored to the RAM memory.The datalogger consist of 1...4 channels. The total memory size for thedatalogger is 2048 words (1word == 3 bytes). The total samples/channeldepends on the data type:

• Integer type signal or parameter reserves 1 word.• Real type value reserves 2 words.

Example: Four real type signals are measured. The total sample/channelis 2048/(2 words x 4 channels) = 256 samples.

Datalogger signals can be selected by Drives Window Tool. However,after power down / fail of the control electronics, the default values arevalid.



8.13 MaintenanceThe DCC 600 requires minimum maintenance. It is recommended thatthe unit be kept under more close monitoring after the start-up. There isonly need for the routine check-up once operations have stabilised.

The following safety instructions should be followed in the maintenancework.

WARNING! The maintenance work should only be undertaken by aqualified electrician. No measurements, parts replacements or otherservice procedures not described in this manual should be attempted.Disconnect mains power if fault tracing involves work inside theframe, the motor or the motor cable. The DCC 600 can containdangerous voltages from external control circuits. Exerciseappropriate care when working on the unit. Neglecting theseinstructions can cause physical injury and death.

WARNING! The printed circuit boards contain integrated circuits thatare extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Exercise propitiatecare when working on the unit to avoid permanent damage to thecircuits.

8.13.1 HeatsinkThe heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The rate of pick-updepends on the DC converter usage and the amount and type ofcontamination in the ambient air. The heatsink needs regular cleaning toensure heat dissipation. The DCC 600 can run into overtemperatureWarnings and Faults if the heatsink is not cleaned regularly.

In normal environment, the heatsink should be checked and cleanedannually. DC converters operating in extreme conditions will need to becleaned more often. The best cleaning frequency must be tried outexperimentally.

The dust should be removed gently with a soft brush if the cleaning iscarried out in the same room where the unit is normally operated.Compressed air should not be used for cleaning unless the installationcan be taken apart and the cleaning is carried out in another room (oroutdoors). Fan rotation should be prevented (in order to prevent bearingwear) when using compressed air for heatsink cleaning.



8.13.2 FanThe cooling fan minimum lifetime is calculated at about 60 000 hours, butin an average installation the fan is likely to operate considerably longer.The actual lifetime depends on the DC converter usage and ambienttemperature.The fan is completely sealed and its lifetime cannot be prolonged withcleaning or lubrication. Fan rotation must be prevented whencompressed air is used for cleaning heatsink fins.

Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearingsand the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsinkcleaning. If the DC converter is operated in a critical part of a process,fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing.

Fan failure will be self-evident due to the overtemperature Warnings andFaults. After the heatsink has cooled it is possible to reset theWarning/Fault and briefly operate the motor in a critical application.

A replacement fan is available from ABB. Do not attempt operation withother than ABB specified spare parts. The fan can be withdrawn byremoving the bottom of the frame.

DCC 600 Firmware Manual A-1

AAppendix A - Complete Parameter and Default Settings

The tables in this appendix list all the actual signals, parameters, andalternative settings for the DCC 600. Use these tables as reference whenyou are customizing macros for your DCC 600 application.

Appendixtable A-1 Actual Signals.

Signal name Range/Unit Description

ACTUAL SIGNALS (Group 1)

1 MOTOR SPEED rpm Selected (see parameter 50.3) motor speed value(filtered according to par. 23.5).

2 MOTOR SPEED FILT rpm Filtered (200 ms + par. 23.5) motor speed value.

3 ARM VOLT ACT V Armature voltage of the motor

4 CONV CUR ACT A Actual armature current.+ : Motoring- : Generating

5 MOTOR TORQUE FILT % of motor nominal torque Filtered (par. 42.12) motor torque.

6 FIELD CUR M1 A Filtered (500 ms) field current of motor 1.

7 FIELD CUR M2 A Filtered (500 ms) field current of motor 2.

8 MAINS VOLT ACT V Actual mains voltage.

9 EMF VOLT ACT V Actual motor EMF voltage.

10 HEAT SINK TEMP deg C Temperature of the cooling element.

11 MOTOR SELECTED MOTOR 1;MOTOR 2

Motor selected.

12 SPEED REF Rpm Speed reference before ramp.

13 CTRL LOCATION LOCAL; I/O CTRL; FIELDBUS;M/F CTRL

Active control location.

14 TIME OF USAGE Op hours (h) Elapsed time meter.

15 CONTROL MODE SPEED CONT;TORQUE CONT

Used control mode.

17 DI8-2 STATUS Status of digital inputs DI8 – DI2.




21 DO8-4 STATUS Status of digital outputs.

24 TOTAL INERTIA Kgm2 Calculated inertia from power optimisation autotune

25 EXT DI15-9 STATUS Status of IOE-1 digital inputs

26 AN IN TACHO VALUE V Value of analogue tacho input.

27 SQUARE WAVE Output signal square wave gen.

28 ARM L Rel inductance of the arm circuit.

29 ARM R Rel resistance of the arm circuit.

30 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN P-gain of PI curr. Controller

31 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI curr. Controller

32 DISCONT CUR LIMIT %Ic Curr. Level between discontinuous and continuous curr.

Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings

A-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual


INT ACTUALS (Group 2)

1 SPEED REF 2 rpm Ramp input reference limited by speed limits (parameters 20.1 & 20.2)

2 SPEED REF 3 rpm Ramp output reference

3 SPEED REF 4 rpm Total speed reference = ramp output reference + speed correctionreference

4 SPEED ERROR NEG rpm Actual speed - total speed reference

5 TORQUE PROP REF %TN Speed controller proportional part output

6 TORQUE INTEG REF %TN Speed controller integration part output

9 TORQUE REF 1 %TN Torque reference input to drive (torque ramp output)

10 TORQUE REF 2 %TN Speed controller total output + acceleration compensation reference.Limited with parameters 20.4 & 20.5

11 TORQUE REF 3 %TN Output of "Torque Selector", see parameter 72.2

14 TORQ USED REF %TN Final torque reference used by torque controller (Torque ref 5 with limits)

15 MOTOR TORQUE %TN Actual motor torque

16 FIRING ANGLE Deg Thyristor firing angle (alpha)

17 MEASURED SPEED Rpm Speed measured by pulse encoder

18 POS ACT PPU +/- 32767 Position measurement value (scaled with parameter 70.1)

19 START True; False Start-order from I/O or Fieldbus

20 RUNNING True; False Drive running acknowledgment

21 BRAKE LIFT True; False Brake lift order

22 FAULT True; False Drive fault indication (tripped)

23 APPL DUTY % CPU load

24 SPEED CORR rpm Speed correction reference

25 POWOP SPEEDREF % Power optimisation calculated reference

26 REL FIELD CUR M1 % Field current of motor 1 (in percent of parameter 41.3)

27 REL FIELD CUR M2 % Field current of motor 2 (in percent of parameter 41.17)


FIELDBUS WORDS (Group 3)

1 FB STATUS WORD 0 – FFFF Packed boolean(Hex)

Fieldbus Status Word, Dataset 2 Word 1, For bit details see section 5.6.12

2 FB FAULT WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packed boolean(Hex)

Fieldbus Fault Word 1, Dataset 6 Word 1, For bit details see section 5.6.12






Fieldbus Fault Word 4, Dataset 10 Word 3, For bit details see section5.6.12

6 FB ALARM WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packed boolean(Hex)

Fieldbus Alarm Word 1, Dataset 10 Word 1, For bit details see section5.6.12

7 FB ALARM WORD 2 0 – FFFF Packed boolean(Hex)

Fieldbus Alarm Word 2, Dataset 10 Word 2, For bit details see section5.6.12

8 FB COMMAND WORD 0 – FFFF Packed boolean(Hex)

Fieldbus Command Word, Dataset 1 Word 1, For bit details see section5.6.12

9 FB SPEED REF % Fieldbus Speed reference, Dataset 1 Word 2




INFORMATION (Group 4)

1 SW PACKAGE VER The name of the whole software package

2 DC VERSION Version of the loaded control sw (AMC-DC)

3 APPLIC NAME Name of the loaded FCB application sw

4 CONV NOM VOLT V Converter nominal voltage

5 CONV NOM CURR A Converter nominal current

6 FEX 1 CODE Field exciter 1 type coding

7 FEX 2 CODE Field exciter 2 type coding

8 FEX 1 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 1

9 FEX 2 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 2

10 BOOT SW VERSION Boot sw revision of SDCS-CON-2

11 CONV SW VERSION Converter control se revision of SDCS-CON-2

12 APPLIC VERSION Date of the loaded FCB application sw

13 BASELIB VERSION Version of the application function block library

14 CONVERTER TYPE Recognized converter type

15 QUADRANT TYPE Recognized converter quadrant type

16 CONV OVCUR LEVEL A Converter overcurrent tripping level

17 MAX BRIDGE TEMP Cels Thyristor cooler temperature tripping level

18 FEX 1 COMM STATUS Timeout status of field exc. 1 comm. link

19 FEX 2 COMM STATUS Timeout status of field exc. 2 comm. link

20 FEX 1 COMM ERRORS No. of comm. errors in field exc.1 Comm. link

21 FEX 2 COMM ERRORS No. of comm. errors in field exc. 2 comm. link

23 CON SW PRERELEASE Converter ocntrol sw pre-release of SDCS-CON-2

24 AMC SW PRERELEASE Drive control sw pre-release of SDCS-AMC-DC


DRIVE LOGIC SIGS(Group 6)1 CURR CONTROL STAT 0-FFFF Packed boolean

(Hex)Internal status of the current controller.

2 COMMISS STATUS 0 … 32767 Commissioning status of the SDCS-CON-2 software. See section 3.4 fordetails.

5 CON2 BITS 0-FFFF Packed boolean(Hex)

This packed binary signal includes boolean signals from the SDCS-CON-2board’s software. It is read from the SDCS-CON-2 board every 8ms.



Appendixtable A-2 Parameter Settings.

Parameter Alternative Settings Defaultsetting

Custom Setting

99 START-UP DATA

99.2 APPLICATION MACRO CRANE; M/F CTRL; USER 1 LOAD; USER 1 SAVE; USER 2 LOAD; USER 2SAVE

CRANE

99.3 APPLIC RESTORE NO; YES NO

99.5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 5.0 V … 1800.0 V (printed on the motor nameplate) 350.0 V

99.6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 0.0 A … 10000.0 A (printed on the motor nameplate) 0.0 A

99.8 MOTOR NOM SPEED 20.0 rpm … 7500.0 rpm (printed on the motor nameplate) 1500.0 rpm

99.9 DEVICE NAME Name of drive section can be typed here from Drives Window tool “Device name”

10 DIGITAL INPUTS

10.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 DI6

10.2 ZERO POS SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 NOT USED

10.3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL See 10.2 NOT USED

10.4 FAST STOP-N SEL See 10.2 NOT USED

10.6 SYNC SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9 …EXT DI15 NOT USED

10.8 STEP REF2 SEL See 10.2 NOT USED



10.11 HIGH SPEED SEL See 10.2 NOT USED

10.12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL See 10.1 NOT USED

10.13 ACCELERATE SEL See 10.2 NOT USED

13 ANALOGUE INPUTS

13.1 SCALE AI1 0.000 … 10.000 1.000

13.2 SCALE AI2 0.000 … 10.000 0.000

13.3 SCALE AI3 0.000 … 10.000 0.000

13.4 AN IN TACH HI VAL -32767 … 32767 30000

13.5 AN IN TACH LO VAL -32767 … 32767 -30000

14 I/O OUTPUTS

14.1 DO4 OUTPUT NOT USED; READY; RUNNING; FAULT; FAULT-N; CONTROL LOC;BRAKE LIFT; WATCHDOG-N; USER 1 OR 2; REVERSE; MOT OVERSP;RDY FOR RUN

BRAKE LIFT

14.2 DO5 OUTPUT See 14.1 WATCHDOG-N

14.3 DO6 OUTPUT See 14.1 NOT USED



14.6 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT 0 mV … 10 000 mV 10 000 mV

14.7 ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT -10 000 mV … 10 000 mV 0 mV

14.8 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL -32768 … 32767 10 000

14.9 AN OUT 1 INDEX 0 … 19999 0

14.10 AN OUT 2 NOM VOLT 0 mV … 10 000mV 10 000 mV

14.11 ANOUT 2 OFFS VOLT -10 000 mV … 10 000 mV 0 mV

14.12 AN OUT 2 NOM VAL -32768 … 32767 10 000

14.13 AN OUT 2 INDEX 0 … 19999 0




Custom Setting

15 DRIVE LOGIC PAR

15.2 DRIVE MODE 0 … 22 0

15.3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE; MOTOR 1; MOTOR 2; MOTOR 1 + 2 NONE

15.4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT; DELAYED IMMEDIAT

15.5 USED FEX TYPE 0 … 13 0

15.6 FIELD CONTRL MODE FIX; EMF; FIX/REV; EMF/REV; FIX/OPTI/REV; EMF/OPTI/REV; FIX/OPTI;EMF/OPTI

FIX

15.7 EXT FAN ACK MODE TRIP; ALARM; NO SUPERVIS NO SUPERVIS

15.10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED; ENABLED; ALWAYS DISABLED

15.11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE; ENABLE DISABLE

15.12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL DISABLE; ENABLE DISABLE

15.17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms 200 ms

15.18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED; DI1 … DI8 NOT USED

15.19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms 100 ms

16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS

16.2 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN; LOCKED OPEN

16.3 PASS CODE 0 ... 30 000 0

16.4 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT SEL

16.5 USER MACRO CH SRCE NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9; EXT DI10; COMM MODULE NOT SEL

16.6 SHARED MOTION SEL OFF; ON; FORCE MOT 2 OFF

17 TEST GEN PAR

17.1 POT 1 -32768 … 32767 0

17.2 POT 2 -32768 … 32767 0

17.3 SQR WAVE PERIOD 10 ms … 100000 ms 10 ms

17.4 TEST REF SELECT 0; POT1; POT2; SQR WAV; TST REF 0

20 LIMITS

20.1 MINIMUM SPEED - 12 000 rpm … 0 rpm -1500 rpm

20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 rpm … 12 000 rpm 1500 rpm

20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE 0.5 %TN … 325.0 %TN 100.0 %TN

20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE -325.0 %TN … -1.0 %TN -100.0%TN

20.12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDG 0.0 %Im … 400.0 %Im 100.0 %Im

20.13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDG -400.0%Im … 400.0 %Im -100.0 %Im

20.14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 0 deg … 165 deg 150 deg

20.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 0 deg … 165 deg 15 deg

20.16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV 0.0 %If1…200.0 %If1 115.0 %If1

20.17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV 0.0 %If2…200.0 %If2 115.0 %If2

23 SPEED CTRL

23.1 KPS 0.0 … 325.0 10.0

23.2 TIS 0 ms … 32767 ms 300 ms

23.3 DERIVATION TIME O ms … 10000 ms 0 ms

23.4 ACC COMP DER TIME 0 s … 100 s 0 s

23.5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 … 10 000 ms 0 ms

23.6 SPEED STEP (only for DW) -2457 rpm … 2457 rpm 0 rpm

24 TORQUE CTRL (not visible if par 72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE = FOLLOWER)

24.1 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s ... 120.00 s 0.00 s

24.2 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s ... 120.00 s 0.00 s

24.3 TORQ STEP (only for DW) -325.0 %TN … 325.0 %TN 0.0 %




Custom Setting

28 MOTOR PROTECTION

28.1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC 0 s … 5400 s 240 s

28.2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR 0 % … 245 %Im 100 %Im

28.3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 10 % … 130 % 120 %

28.4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 10 % … 130 % 130 %

28.5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 0 s … 5400 s 240 s

28.6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 0 % … 245 %Im 100 %Im

28.7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 10 % … 130 % 120 %

28.8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 10 % … 130 % 130 %

28.9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED; 1 • PT100; 2 • PT100; 3 • PT 100; PTC; SCALED A/D NOT USED

28.10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx

28.11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx

28.12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED; 1 • PT100; 2 • PT100; 3 • PT 100; PTC; SCALED A/D NOT USED

28.13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx

28.14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx

28.18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED; DI4; NOT USED; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT USED

28.19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL NOT USED; ACTIVATED NOT USED

28.20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM 0 A … 20 A 4 A

28.21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL 0 ms … 10000 ms 10 ms

28.22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV 25 % … 500 % 25.0%Us…500.0%Us 150.0 %Us

28.23 SPD MEAS MON LEV 0.0 rpm … 7500.0 rpm 15.0 rpm

28.24 SPD EMF MON LEV 0.0V … 1500.0 V 50.0 V

28.25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED; DI4; NOT USED; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT USED

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS

30.2 PANEL LOSS FAULT; NO FAULT

30.3 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT SEL

30.12 MASTER FAULT FUNC FAULT; NO; WARNING (only visible in fieldbus mode) FAULT

30.13 COMM FLT TIME-OUT 0.10s…60.00s (only visible in fieldbus mode) 1.00s

40 UNDERVOLT MONIT

40.1 U NET MIN 1 0.0 %Us … 130.0 %Us 80.0 %Us

40.2 U NET MIN 2 0.0 %Us … 130.0 %Us 80.0 %Us

40.3 POWER DOWN TIME 0 ms … 10000 ms 5000 ms

41 MOTOR NOM VAL

41.3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A … 655.3 A (on motor nameplate) 0.3 A

41.10 CUR REF SLOPE 0 %/ms … 30 %/ms 10 %/ms

41.11 ARM L 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0

41.12 ARM R 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0

41.14 FLD CUR@ 40% FLUX 0.0%If1…100.0%If1 40.0%If1



41.17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A … 655.3 A (on motor nameplate) 0.3 A

41.19 INT EMF REF 10.0 %Us … 146.0 %Us 105.0 %Us




Custom Setting

42 MEASUREMENT

42.1 MAINS PHASE ORDER R – T – S; R – S – T R – S – T

42.5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 20 % … 400 % 230 %Ic

42.6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT 50 V … 1400 V (Rated) or (42.08)

42.7 S CONV NOM CURR 0 A … 30000 A 0 A

42.8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0 V … 2000 V 0 V

42.9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP 0 Cels … 150 Cels 0 Cels

42.10 S CONVERTER TYPE NONE; C1; C2; C3; C4 NONE

42.11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE; 1 QUADRANT; 4 QUADRANT NONE

42.12 TORQ ACT FTC 0 ms … 30000 ms 200 ms

43 CURRENT CONTROL

43.2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN 3.0 … 2997.0 300.0

43.3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN 0.0 … 31968.0 3200.0

43.6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT 0.0%Ic … 100.0%Ic 50.0%Ic

43.10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT; FC1 WARN; FC2 FAULT; FC 2 WARN FC 1 FAULT

43.11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0.0 %Ic … 800.0 %Ic 0.7 %Ic

43.12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 0.0 %Ic … 800.0 %Ic 25.0 %Ic

43.15 REV GAP 0…50 0

44 FIELD EXCITATION

44.1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0

44.2 P-GAIN FEX 1 0.0 … 4096.0 1.0

44.3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 0.0 … 40960.0 ms 200.0 ms

44.7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0

44.8 P-GAIN FEX 2 0.0 … 4096.0 1.0

44.9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 0.0… 40960.0 ms 200.0 ms

44.13 FIELD 1 REF RED 0.0 % … 100.0%If1 30.0 %If1

44.17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 0.0 % … 100.0%If1 50.0 %If1

44.21 FIELD 2 REF RED 0.0 % … 100.0%If2 30.0 %If2

44.22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 0.0 % … 100.0%If2 50.0 %If2

46 EMF CONTROL

46.1 POS LIM EMF CON 0.0 % … 100.0%Fn 10.0 %Fn

46.2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100.0 … 0.0 %Fn -100.0 %Fn

46.3 EMF CON KP 1 … 32767 150

46.4 EMF CON KI 0 … 32767 5000

46.5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV 0 % … 36 % 2 %

46.6 EMF ACT FILT TC 0 ms … 10000 ms 10 ms

46.9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 0 ms … 10000 ms 10 ms

46.11 V STEP -500%…500% 0%

50 SPEED MEASURING

50.2 SPEED MEAS MODE A_-B DIR; A _-_; A _-_ B DIR; A _-_ B _-_ A _-_ B _-_

50.3 SPEED FB SEL CALC BY EMF; CON-ENCODER; NTAC MODULE; ANALOG TAC CALC BY EMF

50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR 125 … 6000 1024

51 MASTER ADAPTER (Only visible when COMM MODULE is selected, par. 98.2)

51.1 MODULE TYPE (Fieldbus module type connected) (module type)

51.2 … 51.15 (Fieldbus module parameters per connected type of module)




Custom Setting

60 LOCAL OPERATION

60.1 LOC OPER INH True; False False

60.2 LOC SPEED MAX 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 10.0 %

60.3 LOC ZERO SPEED TD 0.0 s ... 300.0 s 60.0 s

61 SPEED MONITOR

61.1 ZERO SPEED LEV 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 1.0 %

61.2 ZERO SPEED TIME 0 ms ... 10000 ms 200 ms

61.3 MOT OVERSPEED LEV 0 ... 200 % 110 %

62 TORQUE MONITOR

62.1 TORQ MON SEL True; False True

62.2 SP DEV LEV 0 ... 100 % 10 %

62.3 TORQ FLT TD 0 ... 60000 ms 600 ms

62.4 SP DER BLK LEV 0 ... 100 %/s 8 %/s

63 FAST STOP

63.1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1; FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3 NOT USED

63.2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1; FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3 NOT USED

64 CRANE

64.1 STAND ALONE SEL True; False True

64.2 CONTIN GEAR True; False False

64.3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 98.0 %

64.4 DEADZONE A 0 % ... 100 % 0 %

64.5 DEADZONE B 0 % ... 100 % 0 %

64.6 REF SHAPE 0 ... 100 20

64.7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF 0 % ... 100 % 25 %

64.8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 0.3 s

64.9 TORQUE REF SCALE 0.00 ... 4.00 1.00

64.10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK; RADIO CTRL; MOTOR POT; STEP JOYST; STEP RADIO JOYSTICK

64.11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 0.0 %

64.12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 0 ms ... 5000 ms 400 ms

64.13 STEP REF LEVEL 1 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 10.0 %

64.14 STEP REF LEVEL 2 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 25.0 %

64.15 STEP REF LEVEL 3 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 50.0 %

64.16 STEP REF LEVEL 4 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 100.0 %

65 LOGIC HANDLER

65.1 CONTIN ON True; False True

65.2 OFF TD 0.0 s ... 10000.0 s 180.0 s

66 TORQUE PROVING

66.1 TORQ PROV SEL True; False False

66.2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.0 s ...100.0 s 0.5 s

66.3 TORQ PROV REF -200.0 % ... 200.0 % 20.0 %

66.4 REGEN TEST SEL True; False True

67 MECH BRAKE CONT

67.1 BRAKE FALL TIME 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 1.0 s

67.2 BRAKE FLT TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 1.0 s

67.3 BRAKE INT ACKN True; False False

67.4 BRAKE LIFT TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 0.0 s

67.5 BRAKE LONG FT TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 4.0 s




Custom Setting

68 POWER OPTIMIZE

68.1 POWOP SELECT True; False False

68.2 BASE SPEED 1.0 % ... 100.0 % 100.0 %

68.3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL True; False False

68.4 INERTIA TOTAL UP 0.00 kgm2 ... 100.00 kgm2 3.00 kgm2

68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN 0.00 kgm2 ... 100.00 kgm2 3.00 kgm2

68.6 TQLIM UP 0.0 % ... 200.0 % 100.0 %

68.7 TQLIM DWN 0.0 % ... 200.0 % 75.0 %

68.8 POWOP RESET LEV 0 % ... 100 % 12 %

69 REFERENCE HANDLER

69.1 SPEED SCALING RPM 0 rpm ... 5000 rpm 1500 rpm

69.2 ACC TIME FORW 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s

69.3 ACC TIME REV 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s

69.4 DEC TIME FORW 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s

69.5 DEC TIME REV 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s

69.6 S-RAMP TC 0.0 s ... 10.0 s 0.0 s

69.7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 0.5 ... 100.0 2 .0

69.8 SPEED REF TD 0.05 s ... 10.00 s 0.05 s

69.9 START TORQ SEL NOT USED; AUTO TQ MEM; LOAD MEAS NOT USED

69.10 RAMP RATE=1 True; False True

70 POS MEASURE

70.1 POS SCALE 1.00 ... 32767.00 PPU 100.00 PPU

70.2 SYNC COND Pos; Neg Pos

71 FIELDBUS COMM

71.1 COMTEST FLT TD 0 ms ... 32767 ms 300 ms

71.4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE; STD DRIVE ENG DRIVE

72 MASTER / FOLLOWER

72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE OFF; MASTER; FOLLOWER (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) OFF

72.2 TORQUE SELECTOR ZERO; SPEED; TORQUE; MINIMUM; MAXIMUM; ADD ZERO

72.3 LOAD SHARE 0.0 % … 400.0 % (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 100.0 %

72.4 WINDOW SEL ON OFF; ON OFF

72.5 WINDOW WIDTH POS 0.0 rpm ... 12000.0 rpm 0.0 rpm

72.6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG 012000.0 rpm ... 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm

72.7 DROOP RATE 0.00 % ... 800.00 % 0.00 %

72.8 TORQ REF A FTC 0 ms … 32767 ms (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 0 ms

72.9 M/F FAULT TD 0 ms … 32767 ms (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 200 ms

72.10 M/F COMM ERR TD 0 ms … 32767 ms (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 200 ms

72.11 MF BROADCAST MODE NO; YES NO

80 SHARED MOTION (Not visible when par. 16.6=OFF)

80.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL2 NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 DI8

80.2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKE LIFT NOT USED

80.3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKE LIFT BRAKE LIFT

80.4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 0.5…325.0%TN -100.0%TN

80.5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 -325.0…-1.0%TN -100.0%TN

80.6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 0.0…400.0%Im 100.0%Im

80.7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 -400.0…400.0%Im -100.0%Im

80.8 KPS 2 0.0…325.0 10.0

80.9 TIS 2 0…32767 ms 300 ms

80.10 ARM L 2 0.0…32767.0 0.0

80.11 ARM R ö2 0.0…32767.0 0.0

80.12 INT EMF REF 2 10.0…146.0%Us 105.0%Us




Custom Setting

80.13 ARM CUR PI PGAIN2 3.0…2997.0 300.0

80.14 ARM CUR PI IGAIN2 0.0…31968.0 3200.0

80.15 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 0.0…100.0%Ic 50.0%Ic

80.16 SPEED FR SEL 2 CALC BY EMF; CON-ENCODER; NTAC MODULE; ANALOG TAC CALC BY EMF

80.17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 0.0…100.0% 1.0%

80.18 SP DEV LEV 2 0…1000% 10%

80.19 TORQ FLT TD 2 0…60000 ms 600ms

80.20 SP DER BLK LEV 2 0…100%/s 8%/s

80.21 TORQ PROV SEL 2 True; False False

80.22 POWOP SELECT 2 True; False False

80.23 BASE SPEED 2 1.0…100.0% 100.0%

80.24 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 0…5000rpm 1500rpm

80.25 ACC TIME FORW 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s

80.26 ACC TIME REV 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s

80.27 DEC TIME FORW 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s

80.28 DEC TIME REV 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s

80.29 SPEED REF TD 2 0.05…10.00 s 0.05 s

80.30 START TORQ SEL 2 NOT USED; AUTO TQ MEM; LOAD MEAS NOT USED

80.31 POS SCALE 2 1.00…32767.00 PPU 100.00PPU

80.32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 5.0…1800.0V 350.0 V

80.33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 0.0…10000.0A 0.0A

80.34 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2 20.0…7500.0rpm 1500.0 rpm

80.35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD 0.0…5.0s 0.3s

92 DATASET TR ADDR

92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 0 … 9999 202

92.2 DATASET 4 WORD 2 0 … 9999 218

92.3 DATASET 4 WORD 3 0 … 9999 104

98 OPTION MODULES

98.2 COMM MODULE NO; FIELDBUS; ADVANT NO

98.3 CH3 NODE ADDR 1 ... 254 1

98.4 CH0 NODE ADDR 1 … 254 1

98.8 IO BOARD CONFIG NO I/O BOARD; IOB2; IOB3; IOB2+3; IOE; IOE+IOB2; IOE+IOB3;IOE+IOB2+3

IOB2+3

DCC 600 Firmware Manual B-1

B Appendix B - User I/O Interface diagrams

The Figures in this appendix shows typical connections at I/O boardsIOB-21, IOB-3 and IOE-1, for different control modes.

IOB-37 VREF

X48 GND

Reference voltage 10 VDC max 5mA

3 AI 1-4 AI 1+

Speed reference0…10V <--> 0…100%

5 AI 2-6 AI 2+

Torque reference0…10V <--> 0…Tmax

7 AI 3-

X3

8 AI 3+Speed correction+/- 10V <--> +/- 100%

1 AO 1+2 AO 1-

Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0–10V…+10V <--> -100…100%

3 AO 2+X4

4 AO 2-Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0–10V…+10V <--> -100…100%

IOB-21

X7 3,4 +48V Power supply for IOB-21 digital inputs, 48 VDC, max. 50 mA

1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge2 DI 2 Programmable digital input: zero position3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A

X6

8 DI 8 Digital input: Start direction B

1 DI9 Programmable digital input; Slowdown-N2 DI10 Programmable digital input; Fast stop-N3 DI11 Programmable digital input4 DI12 Programmable digital input5 OV for DI9-126 DI13 Programmable digital input7 DI14 Programmable digital input8 DI15 Programmable digital input

IOE-1 *)

X1(24V)

9 OV for DI13-15

IOB-2112

DO1 Relay output; Converter Fan order

34

DO2 Relay output; Field Exciter order

56

DO3 Relay output; Main Contactor order

7

X4

8DO4

Programmable relay output; Brake liftAC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-

12

DO5Programmable relay output; Watchdog-NAC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-

3X5

4DO6

Programmable relay outputAC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-

Appendixfigure B-1 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Joystick control*) Optional I/O board.

Appendix B – User I/O Interface diagrams

DCC 600 Firmware ManualB-2

IOB-37 VREF

X48 GND


3 AI 1-4 AI 1+

Speed reference0…10V <--> 0…100%

5 AI 2-6 AI 2+

Torque reference0…10V <--> 0…Tmax

7 AI 3-

X3


1 AO 1+2 AO 1-


3 AO 2+X4


IOB-21


1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge2 DI 2 Programmable digital input: Not used3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A

X6



IOE-1 *)

X1(24V)

9 OV for DI13-15

IOB-2112


34


56


7

X4

8DO4


12


3X5

4DO6


Appendixfigure B-2 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Radio control.

*) Optional I/O board.



IOB-37 VREF

X48 GND


3 AI 1-4 AI 1+5 AI 2-6 AI 2+7 AI 3-

X3


1 AO 1+2 AO 1-


3 AO 2+X4


IOB-21


1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge2 DI 2 Programmable digital input; Increase3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A

X6



IOE-1 *)

X1(24V)

9 OV for DI13-15

IOB-2112


34


56


7

X4

8DO4


12


3X5

4DO6


Appendixfigure B-3 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Motor Pot. Control.

*) Optional I/O board


DCC 600 Firmware ManualB-4

IOB-37 VREF

X48 GND


3 AI 1-4 AI 1+5 AI 2-6 AI 2+7 AI 3-

X3


1 AO 1+2 AO 1-


3 AO 2+X4


IOB-21


1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge2 DI 2 Programmable digital input: zero position3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A

X6


1 DI9 Programmable digital input; Slowdown-N2 DI10 Programmable digital input; Fast stop-N3 DI11 Programmable digital input; Step ref 24 DI12 Programmable digital input; Step ref 35 OV for DI9-126 DI13 Programmable digital input; Step ref 47 DI14 Programmable digital input8 DI15 Programmable digital input

IOE-1 *)

X1(24V)

9 OV for DI13-15

IOB-2112


34


56


7

X4

8DO4


12


3X5

4DO6


Appendixfigure B-4 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Step Joystick control.




IOB-37 VREF

X48 GND


3 AI 1-4 AI 1+5 AI 2-6 AI 2+7 AI 3-

X3


1 AO 1+2 AO 1-


3 AO 2+X4


IOB-21


1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge2 DI 2 Programmable digital input3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge7 DI 7 Programmable digital input; Sync

X6

8 DI 8

1 DI9 Programmable digital input2 DI10 Programmable digital input3 DI11 Programmable digital input4 DI12 Programmable digital input5 OV for DI9-126 DI13 Programmable digital input7 DI14 Programmable digital input8 DI15 Programmable digital input

IOE-1 *)

X1(24V)

9 OV for DI13-15

IOB-2112


34


56


7

X4

8DO4


12


3X5

4DO6


Appendixfigure B-5 Connections at Fieldbus mode


ABB Automation Systems AB

Crane Systems721 67 VästeråsSWEDENTelephone +46 21 34 00 00Telefax +46 21 34 02 90

Dc600 crane drive-firmware-manual

Documents

Transcript of Dc600 crane drive-firmware-manual